L

PowerScan™ Family
PD/PM96XX

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE

Industrial Corded and Cordless Handheld

Area Imager Bar Code Reader
Datalogic S.r.l.
Via S. Vitalino, 13
40012 Calderara di Reno (BO)
Italy
Tel. +39 051 3147011
Fax +39 051 3147205

© 2011-2022 Datalogic S.p.A. and /or its affiliates

All rights reserved. Without limiting the rights under copyright, no part of this documentation may be
reproduced, stored in or introduced into a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means, or
for any purpose, without the express written permission of Datalogic S.p.A. and/or its affiliates.
Owners of Datalogic products are hereby granted a non-exclusive, revocable license to reproduce and
transmit this documentation for the purchaser's own internal business purposes. Purchaser shall not
remove or alter any proprietary notices, including copyright notices, contained in this documentation and
shall ensure that all notices appear on any reproductions of the documentation.
Electronic versions of this document may be downloaded from the Datalogic website ([Link]-
[Link]). If you visit our website and would like to make comments or suggestions about this or other
Datalogic publications, please let us know via the "Contact" page.

Disclaimer
Datalogic has taken reasonable measures to provide information in this manual that is complete and accu-
rate, however, Datalogic shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein,
nor for incidental or consequential damages resulting from the use of this material. Datalogic reserves the
right to change any specification at any time without prior notice.

Trademarks
Datalogic and the Datalogic logo are registered trademarks of Datalogic S.p.A. in many countries, including
the U.S.A. and the E.U.
PowerScan is a trademark of Datalogic S.p.A. and/or its affiliates, registered in the U.S. All other trade-
marks and brands are property their respective owners.

Patents
See [Link] for patent list.

Software Version
This manual refers to the following software versions and later: BL41 03/Feb/2022.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PREFACE ................................................................................................................XIII
About this Manual ......................................................................................................... xiii
overview ...................................................................................................................... xiii
Manual Conventions ......................................................................................................................... xiv
Technical Support ......................................................................................................... xiv
Support Through the Website .......................................................................................................... xiv
Reseller Technical Support .............................................................................................................. xiv
.................................................................................................................................... xiv

CHAPTER 1. INTRODUCTION..................................................................................... 1
About the Reader ............................................................................................................. 1
General Features .................................................................................................................................2
PM96XX 4-key and 16-key Models .....................................................................................................3
Battery Safety (only for PM96XX) ..................................................................................... 4
Programming the Reader ................................................................................................. 5
Configuration Methods ........................................................................................................................5
Programming Bar Codes ............................................................................................................5
Datalogic Aladdin™ .....................................................................................................................5

CHAPTER 2. SETUP .................................................................................................. 6

Unpacking ....................................................................................................................... 6
Setting Up the PowerScan™ PD96XX reader ..................................................................... 6
Connect Host Interface ..................................................................................................... 6
Connecting the Cable ...........................................................................................................................6
RS-232 Serial Connection ...................................................................................................................7
USB Connection ...................................................................................................................................8
Keyboard Wedge Connection ..............................................................................................................8
Using the PowerScan™ PD96XX ..................................................................................... 10
Using the PowerScan™ PM96XX ..................................................................................... 10
Setting Up the PowerScan™ PM96XX Reader .................................................................. 11
Charging the Batteries ................................................................................................... 11
Linking the Reader ........................................................................................................ 12
Link Datalogic RF Devices to Base ...................................................................................................12
Power Off ...........................................................................................................................................12
Set Date and Time (optional) ............................................................................................................12
Using the BC96XX base station ....................................................................................... 13
Mounting Instructions ..................................................................................................... 14
Permanent Mounting ........................................................................................................................14
Wall Mounting ...................................................................................................................................14
Changing the Orientation of the Positioning Tab: ....................................................................15
Portable Desktop Mounting ..............................................................................................................16
Base Station Fast Release - Mounting the Plate .....................................................................16
Connection Module Fast Release - Mounting the Bracket ................................................. 18
System Connections ....................................................................................................... 20
Connecting and Disconnecting the Cables ........................................................................ 21
Connecting BC9630 cables ...............................................................................................................21
Disconnecting BC9630 cables ...........................................................................................................22
Connecting BC9631 multi-interface cable ........................................................................................23

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE iii

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Connecting BC9680 cables ...............................................................................................................24

Connecting the Base Station ...........................................................................................25
System and network layouts ...........................................................................................27
Stand Alone Layouts .........................................................................................................................27
BC96xX Configuration .....................................................................................................28
Serial Configuration .......................................................................................................................... 28
Configuration Bar Codes ................................................................................................................... 28
Interface Selection .........................................................................................................28
Configuring the Interface ................................................................................................29
Customizing Configuration Settings .................................................................................32
Using the Programming Bar Codes ................................................................................................. 32
Datalogic Aladdin™ Utility ................................................................................................................ 32
Interface Settings ..............................................................................................................................32
Configuring Other Features .............................................................................................................. 33
Software Version Transmission ....................................................................................................... 33
Resetting the Product Configuration to Defaults ............................................................................33
Restore Custom Default Configuration ....................................................................................33

CHAPTER 3. CONFIGURATION WITH BAR CODES..................................................... 34

Configuration Parameters ...............................................................................................34
Interface Configuration: ............................................................................................................ 34
Parameters common to all interface applications: ................................................................. 34
Symbology-specific parameters: ............................................................................................. 35
GLOBAL INTERFACE FEATURES .....................................................................................................36
Host Commands — Obey/Ignore ............................................................................................. 36
USB Suspend Mode ..................................................................................................................36
RS-232 INTERFACE .......................................................................................................37
RS-232 STANDARD SETTINGS ......................................................................................................... 38
Baud Rate .................................................................................................................................. 38
Data Bits .................................................................................................................................... 39
Stop Bits .................................................................................................................................... 39
Parity ......................................................................................................................................... 40
Handshaking Control ................................................................................................................ 41
RS-232/USB-COM INTERFACES .....................................................................................42
RS-232/USB-COM SETTINGS ........................................................................................................... 43
Intercharacter Delay ................................................................................................................. 43
Beep On ASCII BEL ................................................................................................................... 44
Beep On Not on File ..................................................................................................................44
ACK NAK Options ..................................................................................................................... 45
ACK Character ........................................................................................................................... 46
NAK Character .......................................................................................................................... 46
ACK NAK Timeout Value ..........................................................................................................47
ACK NAK Retry Count .............................................................................................................. 47
ACK NAK Error Handling ..........................................................................................................48
Indicate Transmission Failure .................................................................................................. 48
Disable Character ...................................................................................................................... 49
Enable Character .......................................................................................................................49
KEYBOARD INTERFACE .................................................................................................50
COUNTRY MODE ................................................................................................................................ 51
Setup on PC to use ALT Universal ...................................................................................51
Setting Country Mode ...............................................................................................................52
OTHER KEYBOARD PARAMETERS ...................................................................................................66
Encoding Type ........................................................................................................................... 66
ALT Output Type .......................................................................................................................73
Caps Lock State ........................................................................................................................ 74
Numlock .................................................................................................................................... 74
Keyboard Numeric Keypad ...................................................................................................... 75
Keyboard Send Control Characters .........................................................................................75
Wedge Quiet Interval ................................................................................................................ 76
Intercharacter Delay ................................................................................................................. 76
Intercode Delay .........................................................................................................................77

iv POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

USB Keyboard Speed ................................................................................................................78

USB-OEM INTERFACE ................................................................................................... 79
USB-OEM Device Usage ...........................................................................................................80
DATA FORMAT .............................................................................................................. 81
GLOBAL SETTINGS ...........................................................................................................................82
Global Prefix/Suffix ...................................................................................................................82
Case Conversion ........................................................................................................................83
Character Conversion ...............................................................................................................83
Global AIM ID .............................................................................................................................84
GS1-128 AIM ID .........................................................................................................................84
LABEL ID ...........................................................................................................................................85
Label ID: Pre-loaded Sets .........................................................................................................85
Label ID: Set Individually Per Symbology ................................................................................86
Label ID Control ........................................................................................................................86
Label ID Symbology Selection ..................................................................................................87
READING PARAMETERS ................................................................................................ 92
SCANNING FEATURES ......................................................................................................................93
Scan Mode .................................................................................................................................93
Scanning Active Time ................................................................................................................94
Flash On Time ............................................................................................................................94
Flash Off Time ...........................................................................................................................95
Double Read Timeout ...............................................................................................................95
Stand Detection Behavior (Desk only) .....................................................................................97
Stand Mode/Object Detection Indication (Stand Mode Flash) .................................................98
Stand Mode/Object Detection Sensitivity .................................................................................98
Stand Mode/Object Detection Illumination Off Time ...............................................................99
Illumination Intensity ................................................................................................................99
Corded Stand Mode .................................................................................................................100
Dock Detection Beep ...............................................................................................................100
LED AND BEEPER INDICATORS .....................................................................................................101
Power On Alert ........................................................................................................................101
Good Read Beep Type .............................................................................................................101
Good Read Beep Frequency ...................................................................................................102
Good Read Beep Length .........................................................................................................103
Good Read Beeper Volume / Vibration ..................................................................................104
Vibration Feedback for Good Read .........................................................................................104
RGB Good Read Enable ...........................................................................................................105
RGB Good Read Color .............................................................................................................105
Good Read LED Duration ........................................................................................................106
Good Read: When to Indicate .................................................................................................107
Green Spot Duration ...............................................................................................................107
CAMERA CONTROL .........................................................................................................................108
Aiming Pointer ........................................................................................................................108
Pick Mode ................................................................................................................................108
Mobile Phone Mode .................................................................................................................109
Image Capture .........................................................................................................................110
Multiple Labels Ordering by Code Symbology .......................................................................110
Multiple Labels Ordering by Code Length ..............................................................................110
1D SYMBOLOGIES ....................................................................................................... 111
DISABLE ALL SYMBOLOGIES .........................................................................................................112
COUPON CONTROL .........................................................................................................................112
Coupon Control .......................................................................................................................112
UPC-A ..............................................................................................................................................113
UPC-A Enable/Disable ............................................................................................................113
UPC-A Check Character Transmission ..................................................................................113
Expand UPC-A to EAN-13 ......................................................................................................114
UPC-A Number System Character Transmission .................................................................114
UPC-E ...............................................................................................................................................115
UPC-E Enable/Disable ............................................................................................................115
UPC-E Check Character Transmission ..................................................................................115
Expand UPC-E to EAN-13 .......................................................................................................116

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE v

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Expand UPC-E to UPC-A ........................................................................................................116

UPC-E Number System Character Transmission .................................................................117
GTIN Formatting .....................................................................................................................117
EAN-13 ............................................................................................................................................118
EAN-13 Enable/Disable ..........................................................................................................118
EAN-13 Check Character Transmission ................................................................................118
EAN-13 Flag 1 Character ........................................................................................................119
EAN-13 to ISBN Conversion ...................................................................................................119
EAN-13 to ISSN Conversion ...................................................................................................120
EAN-8 ..............................................................................................................................................121
EAN-8 Enable/Disable ............................................................................................................121
EAN-8 Check Character Transmission ..................................................................................121
Expand EAN-8 to EAN-13 ......................................................................................................122
UPC/EAN GLOBAL SETTINGS ........................................................................................................123
UPC/EAN Price Weight Check ................................................................................................123
UPC/EAN Quiet Zones ............................................................................................................124
Add-Ons ...................................................................................................................................124
Optional Add-ons ....................................................................................................................125
Optional Add-On Timer ...........................................................................................................126
GS1 DATABAR™ OMNIDIRECTIONAL ............................................................................................127
GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional Enable/Disable ......................................................................127
GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional to GS1-128 Emulation ...........................................................127
GS1 DATABAR™ EXPANDED .........................................................................................................128
GS1 DataBar Expanded Enable/Disable .................................................................................128
GS1 DataBar Expanded to GS1-128 Emulation .....................................................................128
GS1 DataBar Expanded Length Control .................................................................................129
GS1 DataBar Expanded Set Length 1 ....................................................................................129
GS1 DataBar Expanded Set Length 2 ....................................................................................130
GS1 DATABAR™ LIMITED ..............................................................................................................131
GS1 DataBar Limited Enable/Disable ....................................................................................131
GS1 DataBar Limited to GS1-128 Emulation ........................................................................131
CODE 39 ...........................................................................................................................................132
Code 39 Enable/Disable ..........................................................................................................132
Code 39 Check Character Calculation ....................................................................................132
Code 39 Check Character Transmission ................................................................................133
Code 39 Start/Stop Character Transmission .........................................................................133
Code 39 Full ASCII ...................................................................................................................134
Code 39 Quiet Zones ...............................................................................................................134
Code 39 Length Control ..........................................................................................................135
Code 39 Set Length 1 ..............................................................................................................135
Code 39 Set Length 2 ..............................................................................................................136
TRIOPTIC CODE ...............................................................................................................................137
Trioptic Code Enable/Disable .................................................................................................137
CODE 39 DANISH PPT .....................................................................................................................137
Code 39 Danish PPT Enable/Disable ......................................................................................137
CODE 39 PZN ...................................................................................................................................138
Code 39 PZN Enable/Disable ..................................................................................................138
CODE 39 LA POSTE .........................................................................................................................138
Code 39 La Poste Enable/Disable ..........................................................................................138
CODE 32 (ITALIAN PHARMACEUTICAL) ........................................................................................139
Code 32 Enable/Disable ..........................................................................................................139
Code 32 Feature Setting Exceptions ......................................................................................139
Code 32 Check Character Transmission ................................................................................139
Code 32 Start/Stop Character Transmission .........................................................................140
CODE 39 CIP HR (FRENCH PHARMACEUTICAL) ...........................................................................140
Code 39 CIP HR Enable/Disable .............................................................................................140
CODE 128 .........................................................................................................................................141
Code 128 Enable/Disable ........................................................................................................141
Expand Code 128 to Code 39 ..................................................................................................141
Code 128 Check Character Transmission ..............................................................................142
Code 128 Function Character Transmission .........................................................................142

vi POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

Code 128 Quiet Zones .............................................................................................................143

Code 128 Length Control ........................................................................................................143
Code 128 Set Length 1 ............................................................................................................144
Code 128 Set Length 2 ............................................................................................................144
GS1-128 ...........................................................................................................................................145
GS1-128 Enable .......................................................................................................................145
INTERLEAVED 2 OF 5 (I 2 OF 5) ......................................................................................................146
I 2 of 5 Enable/Disable ............................................................................................................146
I 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation ......................................................................................146
I 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission ..................................................................................147
I 2 of 5 Length Control ............................................................................................................148
I 2 of 5 Set Length 1 ................................................................................................................148
I 2 of 5 Set Length 2 ................................................................................................................149
INTERLEAVED 2 OF 5, FEBRABAN
(DESK MODELS ONLY) ...................................................................................................................150
Interleaved 2 of 5, Febraban format Enable / Disable ...........................................................150
INTERLEAVED 2 OF 5 CIP HR .........................................................................................................150
Interleaved 2 of 5 CIP HR Enable/Disable ..............................................................................150
MATRIX 2 OF 5 .................................................................................................................................151
Matrix 2 of 5 Enable/Disable ...................................................................................................151
Matrix 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation .............................................................................151
Matrix 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission .........................................................................152
Matrix 2 of 5 Length Control ...................................................................................................152
Matrix 2 of 5 Set Length 1 ......................................................................................................153
Matrix 2 of 5 Set Length 2 ......................................................................................................153
STANDARD 2 OF 5 ...........................................................................................................................154
Standard 2 of 5 Enable/Disable ..............................................................................................154
Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation ........................................................................154
Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission ....................................................................155
Standard 2 of 5 Length Control ..............................................................................................155
Standard 2 of 5 Set Length 1 ..................................................................................................156
Standard 2 of 5 Set Length 2 ..................................................................................................156
COMPRESSED 2 OF 5 ......................................................................................................................157
Compressed 2 of 5 Enable/Disable ........................................................................................157
Compressed 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation ..................................................................157
Compressed 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission ..............................................................158
Compressed 2 of 5 Length Control ........................................................................................158
Compressed 2 of 5 Set Length 1 ............................................................................................159
Compressed 2 of 5 Set Length 2 ............................................................................................159
DATALOGIC 2 OF 5 ..........................................................................................................................160
Datalogic 2 of 5 Enable/Disable ..............................................................................................160
Datalogic 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation ........................................................................160
Datalogic 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission ....................................................................161
Datalogic 2 of 5 Length Control ..............................................................................................161
Datalogic 2 of 5 Set Length 1 .................................................................................................162
Datalogic 2 of 5 Set Length 2 .................................................................................................162
INDUSTRIAL 2 OF 5 .........................................................................................................................163
Industrial 2 of 5 Enable/Disable .............................................................................................163
Industrial 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation ........................................................................163
Industrial 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission ....................................................................164
Industrial 2 of 5 Length Control .............................................................................................164
Industrial 2 of 5 Set Length 1 .................................................................................................165
Industrial 2 of 5 Set Length 2 .................................................................................................165
IATA ..................................................................................................................................................166
IATA Enable/Disable ................................................................................................................166
IATA Check Character Transmission ......................................................................................166
FOLLETT 2 OF 5 ...............................................................................................................................167
Follett 2 of 5 Enable/Disable ..................................................................................................167
CODABAR ........................................................................................................................................168
Codabar Enable/Disable ..........................................................................................................168
Codabar Check Character Calculation ....................................................................................168

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE vii

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Codabar Check Character Transmission ...............................................................................169

Codabar Start/Stop Character Transmission ........................................................................169
Codabar Start/Stop Character Set .........................................................................................170
Codabar Start/Stop Character Match .....................................................................................170
Codabar Quiet Zones ..............................................................................................................171
Codabar Length Control .........................................................................................................172
Codabar Set Length 1 .............................................................................................................172
Codabar Set Length 2 .............................................................................................................173
ABC CODABAR ................................................................................................................................174
ABC Codabar Enable/Disable .................................................................................................174
ABC Codabar Concatenation Mode ........................................................................................174
ABC Codabar Dynamic Concatenation Timeout ....................................................................175
ABC Codabar Force Concatenation ........................................................................................175
ISBT 128 ...........................................................................................................................................176
ISBT 128 Concatenation ..........................................................................................................176
ISBT 128 Concatenation Mode ...............................................................................................176
ISBT 128 Dynamic Concatenation Timeout ...........................................................................177
ISBT 128 Force Concatenation ...............................................................................................178
ISBT 128 Advanced Concatenation Options ...........................................................................178
CODE 11 ...........................................................................................................................................179
Code 11 Enable/Disable ..........................................................................................................179
Code 11 Check Character Calculation ....................................................................................179
Code 11 Check Character Transmission ................................................................................180
Code 11 Length Control ..........................................................................................................180
Code 11 Set Length 1 ..............................................................................................................181
Code 11 Set Length 2 ..............................................................................................................181
CODE 93 ...........................................................................................................................................182
Code 93 Enable/Disable ..........................................................................................................182
Code 93 Check Character Calculation ....................................................................................182
Code 93 Check Character Transmission ................................................................................183
Code 93 Length Control ..........................................................................................................183
Code 93 Set Length 1 ..............................................................................................................184
Code 93 Set Length 2 ..............................................................................................................184
Code 93 Quiet Zones ...............................................................................................................185
MSI ...................................................................................................................................................186
MSI Enable/Disable .................................................................................................................186
MSI Check Character Calculation ...........................................................................................186
MSI Check Character Transmission .......................................................................................187
MSI Length Control .................................................................................................................187
MSI Set Length 1 .....................................................................................................................188
MSI Set Length 2 .....................................................................................................................188
PLESSEY ..........................................................................................................................................189
Plessey Enable/Disable ..........................................................................................................189
Plessey Check Character Calculation .....................................................................................189
Plessey Check Character Transmission ................................................................................190
Plessey Length Control ..........................................................................................................190
Plessey Set Length 1 ..............................................................................................................191
Plessey Set Length 2 ..............................................................................................................191
BC412 ..............................................................................................................................................192
BC412 Enable/Disable ............................................................................................................192
BC412 Check Character Calculation .......................................................................................192
BC412 Length Control ............................................................................................................192
BC412 Set Length 1 ................................................................................................................193
BC412 Set Length 2 ................................................................................................................193
2D SYMBOLOGIES ....................................................................................................... 194
2D GLOBAL FEATURES ..................................................................................................................195
2D Maximum Decoding Time .................................................................................................196
2D Structured Append ............................................................................................................197
2D Normal/Inverse Symbol Control .......................................................................................197
1D Normal/Inverse Symbol Control .......................................................................................198
AZTEC CODE ....................................................................................................................................199

viii POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

 TABLE OF CONTENTS

Aztec Code Enable / Disable ...................................................................................................199

Aztec Code Length Control .....................................................................................................199
Aztec Code Set Length 1 .........................................................................................................200
Aztec Code Set Length 2 .........................................................................................................200
CHINA SENSIBLE CODE ..................................................................................................................201
China Sensible Code Enable / Disable ....................................................................................201
China Sensible Code Length Control ......................................................................................201
China Sensible Code Set Length 1 ..........................................................................................202
China Sensible Code Set Length 2 ..........................................................................................202
DATA MATRIX ..................................................................................................................................203
Data Matrix Enable / Disable ..................................................................................................203
Data Matrix Square/Rectangular Style ..................................................................................203
Data Matrix Length Control ....................................................................................................204
Data Matrix Set Length 1 ........................................................................................................204
Data Matrix Set Length 2 ........................................................................................................205
GS1 DOTCODE .................................................................................................................................206
DotCode Enable .......................................................................................................................206
DotCode High Resolution Enable ...........................................................................................206
DotCode Position-based Decoding ........................................................................................207
Additional Options ...................................................................................................................207
MAXICODE .......................................................................................................................................208
Maxicode Enable / Disable ......................................................................................................208
Maxicode Primary Message Transmission ............................................................................208
Maxicode Length Control ........................................................................................................209
Maxicode Set Length 1 ...........................................................................................................209
Maxicode Set Length 2 ...........................................................................................................210
PDF417 ............................................................................................................................................211
PDF417 Enable / Disable ........................................................................................................211
PDF417 Length Control ..........................................................................................................211
PDF417 Set Length 1 ..............................................................................................................212
PDF417 Set Length 2 ..............................................................................................................212
MICRO PDF417 ................................................................................................................................213
Micro PDF417 Enable / Disable ..............................................................................................213
Micro PDF417 Code 128 GS1-128 Emulation ........................................................................213
Micro PDF417 Length Control ................................................................................................214
Micro PDF417 Set Length 1 ....................................................................................................214
Micro PDF417 Set Length 2 ....................................................................................................215
QR CODE ..........................................................................................................................................216
QR Code Enable / Disable .......................................................................................................216
QR Code Length Control .........................................................................................................216
QR Code Set Length 1 .............................................................................................................217
QR Code Set Length 2 .............................................................................................................217
MICRO QR CODE ..............................................................................................................................218
Micro QR Code Enable / Disable .............................................................................................218
Micro QR Code Length Control ...............................................................................................218
Micro QR Code Set Length 1 ...................................................................................................219
Micro QR Code Set Length 2 ...................................................................................................219
UCC COMPOSITE ..............................................................................................................................220
UCC Optional Composite Timer ..............................................................................................220
Postal Code Selection .............................................................................................................221
Postnet BB Control .................................................................................................................222
DISPLAY AND KEYBOARD FEATURES ......................................................................... 223
Display and Keyboard Features ..................................................................................... 224
Display Operating Mode ..........................................................................................................224
Display Off Timeout .................................................................................................................224
Backlight Enable .....................................................................................................................225
Font Size ..................................................................................................................................225
Enable/disable buttons ...........................................................................................................226
Key Programming ...................................................................................................................227
Arrow Keys Mode (4-key models only) .................................................................................228
Arrow Up String (4-key models only) ....................................................................................228

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE ix

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Arrow Down String (4-key models only) ...............................................................................229

Configure Actions for Function Keys .............................................................................. 230
ACTION CONFIGURATION FOR FUNCTION KEYS ..........................................................................231
Function Keys Configuration for 16-key Models Only ..........................................................232
Function Keys Configuration for 4-key Models Only .............................................................233
DEFINE STRINGS ............................................................................................................................234
Configure string 1-5. ...............................................................................................................234
ADDITIONAL FEATURES FOR 16-KEY MODELS ...........................................................................235
Last Code Shown Timeout .....................................................................................................235
Display Time Stamping Mode .................................................................................................235
Mode Selection ........................................................................................................................236
Quantity Field ..........................................................................................................................236
Quantity/Code Send Mode ......................................................................................................237
Quantity/Code Separator ........................................................................................................237
Interkey Timeout .....................................................................................................................238
Append Code ...........................................................................................................................239
Echo .........................................................................................................................................240
Keypress Sound ......................................................................................................................240
Lower Case .............................................................................................................................241
Set Function Key Labels .........................................................................................................242
BARCODE/KEY DIFFERENT DATA FORMAT ..................................................................................243
Set Barcode Header ................................................................................................................243
Set Barcode Terminator .........................................................................................................243
Set Key Sequence ID ...............................................................................................................244
Set Key Sequence Header ......................................................................................................244
Set Key Sequence Terminator ................................................................................................244
Set String ID ............................................................................................................................245
Set String Header ....................................................................................................................245
Set String Terminator .............................................................................................................246
OCR DECODING ........................................................................................................... 247
OCR Decoding Predefined Templates ....................................................................................248
MOTION FEATURES ..................................................................................................... 249
Motionless Timeout ................................................................................................................250
Motion Sensitivity ...................................................................................................................250
Motion Aiming Control ............................................................................................................251
POWER MANAGEMENT ................................................................................................ 252
POWER SAVE ..................................................................................................................................253
Powerdown Timeout ..............................................................................................................253
BATTERY PROFILES ........................................................................................................................254
Battery Profiles .......................................................................................................................254
Battery Information ................................................................................................................255
WIRELESS FEATURES ................................................................................................. 256
WIRELESS BEEPER FEATURES .....................................................................................................257
Good Transmission Beep .......................................................................................................257
Beeper Frequency ...................................................................................................................257
Beep Duration .........................................................................................................................258
Beep Volume ...........................................................................................................................259
Disconnect Beep .....................................................................................................................259
Docking (Connecting) Beep ....................................................................................................260
Leash Alarm ............................................................................................................................260
CONFIGURATION UPDATES ...........................................................................................................262
Automatic Configuration Update ............................................................................................262
Copy Configuration to Reader ................................................................................................262
Copy Configuration to Base Station .......................................................................................262
BATCH FEATURES ..........................................................................................................................263
Batch Mode .............................................................................................................................263
Send Batch ..............................................................................................................................263
Erase Batch Memory ..............................................................................................................264
Send but not Erase Batch Memory ........................................................................................264
RF Batch Mode Transmit Delay ..............................................................................................264
DIRECT RADIO AUTOLINK ..............................................................................................................265

x POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

Direct Radio Autolink ..............................................................................................................265

RF ADDRESS STAMPING ................................................................................................................266
Source Radio Address Transmission .....................................................................................266
Source Radio Address Delimiter Character ...........................................................................266
FEATURES FOR STAR MODELS ONLY ...........................................................................................267
STAR Radio Protocol Timeout ................................................................................................267
STAR Radio Transmit Mode ....................................................................................................268
STAR System Speed ...............................................................................................................269
STAR Frequency Agility ..........................................................................................................270

CHAPTER 4. REFERENCES.................................................................................... 272

RS-232 Parameters ..................................................................................................... 273
RS-232 Only ................................................................................................................ 273
Baud Rate ........................................................................................................................................273
Data Bits ..........................................................................................................................................273
Stop Bits ..........................................................................................................................................273
Parity ................................................................................................................................................273
Handshaking Control ......................................................................................................................273
RS-232/USB COM Parameters ...................................................................................... 274
Intercharacter Delay ........................................................................................................................274
ACK NAK Options ............................................................................................................................275
ACK Character .................................................................................................................................275
NAK Character .................................................................................................................................276
ACK NAK Timeout Value .................................................................................................................277
ACK NAK Retry Count .....................................................................................................................278
Disable Character ............................................................................................................................279
Enable Character .............................................................................................................................280
Keyboard Interface ....................................................................................................... 281
Wedge Quiet Interval .......................................................................................................................281
Intercharacter Delay ........................................................................................................................282
Intercode Delay ................................................................................................................................283
Data Format ................................................................................................................ 284
Data Editing .....................................................................................................................................284
Please Keep In Mind... .............................................................................................................284
Global Prefix/Suffix .........................................................................................................................285
Example: Setting a Prefix .......................................................................................................285
Global AIM ID ...................................................................................................................................286
Label ID ............................................................................................................................................287
Label ID: Pre-loaded Sets .......................................................................................................287
Label ID: Set Individually Per Symbology ..............................................................................289
Character Conversion ......................................................................................................................291
Scanning Features ....................................................................................................... 292
Scan Mode .......................................................................................................................................292
Scanning Active Time ......................................................................................................................294
Aiming Duration Time .....................................................................................................................295
Flash On Time ..................................................................................................................................296
Flash Off Time ..................................................................................................................................297
LED and Beeper Indicators ........................................................................................... 298
Good Read LED Duration ................................................................................................................298
RF Features ................................................................................................................. 299
Automatic Configuration Update ....................................................................................................299
RF Address Stamping .....................................................................................................................299
Source Radio Address Delimiter Character ...........................................................................299
STAR Radio Protocol Timeout ........................................................................................................300
Symbologies ................................................................................................................ 301
Set Length .......................................................................................................................................301
Set Length 1 ............................................................................................................................301
Set Length 2 ............................................................................................................................302

CHAPTER 5. MESSAGE FORMATTING .................................................................... 303

Message Formatting ..................................................................................................... 303

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE xi

TABLE OF CONTENTS

LED and Beeper Control ............................................................................................... 304

APPENDIX A. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS.......................................................... 305

PD96XX Technical Specifications ................................................................................... 305
PM96XX Technical Specifications .................................................................................. 307
Decoding Capabilities ................................................................................................... 309
BC96XX Technical Specifications ................................................................................... 310
LED and Beeper Indications .......................................................................................... 311
User Indications for PD96XX ......................................................................................... 311
User Indications for PM96XX (Gun Only) ........................................................................ 312
User Indications for BC96XX Base Stations .................................................................... 314
Programming Mode ...................................................................................................... 315
Troubleshooting ........................................................................................................... 315

APPENDIX B. STANDARD DEFAULTS ................................................................... 317

Default exceptions ........................................................................................................ 331

APPENDIX C. SAMPLE BARCODES........................................................................ 333

Sample Barcodes .......................................................................................................... 333
1D Barcodes ....................................................................................................................................333
GS1 Databar™ (RSS) .......................................................................................................................335
GS1 Databar™ (-14) ........................................................................................................................335
2D Barcodes ....................................................................................................................................336

APPENDIX D. KEYPAD ......................................................................................... 338

APPENDIX E. SCANCODE TABLES ........................................................................ 340

Control Character Emulation ......................................................................................... 340
Single Press and Release Keys ......................................................................................................340
Interface Type PC AT PS/2, USB-Keyboard or USB-Keyboard for APPLE ........................ 341
Interface Type PC AT PS/2, USB-Keyboard or USB-Keyboard for APPLE (continued) ....... 342
Interface Type PC AT PS/2 Alt Mode or USB-Keyboard Alt Mode .................................... 343
Interface Type PC AT PS/2 Alt Mode or USB-Keyboard Alt Mode (continued) ................... 344

APPENDIX F. ASCII CHART................................................................................... 345

xii POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

PREFACE

ABOUT THIS MANUAL

This Product Reference Guide (PRG) is provided for users seeking advanced technical
information, including connection, programming, maintenance and specifications. The
Quick Reference Guide (QRG) and other publications associated with this product are
downloadable free of charge from the website listed on the back cover of this manual.
Typically, units are factory-programmed for the most common terminal and communi-
cations settings. If you need to modify any programmable settings, custom configura-
tion can be accomplished by scanning the programming bar codes within this guide.
Programming can alternatively be performed using the Datalogic Aladdin™ Configura-
tion application, which is available from the Datalogic website listed on the back cover
of this manual. This multi-platform utility program allows device configuration using a
PC. It communicates to the device using a serial or USB cable and can also create config-
uration bar codes to print.

OVERVIEW
Chapter 1, Introduction provides a product overview, battery safety information, and
general information about programming the reader.
Chapter 2, Setup presents information about unpacking and setting up the reader, and
interface configuration bar codes and details.
Chapter 3, Configuration Using Bar Codes provides instructions and bar code labels for
customizing your reader. There are different sections for interface types, general fea-
tures, data formatting, and symbology-specific features.
Chapter 4, References provides details concerning programmable features.
Appendix A, Technical Specifications lists physical and performance characteristics, as
well as environmental specifications. It also provides standard cable pin-outs and
descriptions of the functions and behaviors of the reader’s LED and Beeper indicators.
Appendix B, references common factory default settings for reader features and options.
Appendix C, Sample Bar Codes offers sample bar codes of several common symbologies.
Appendix D, Keypad includes numeric bar codes to be scanned for certain parameter set-
tings.
Appendix E, Scancode Tables lists control character emulation information for Wedge
and USB Keyboard interfaces.
Appendix F, ASCII Chart lists hexadecimal reference values for ASCII characters.

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE xiii

PREFACE

Manual Conventions
The following conventions are used in this document:
The symbols listed below are used in this manual to notify the reader of key issues or
procedures that must be observed when using the reader:
NOTE: This symbol draws attention to details or procedures that may be
useful in improving, maintaining, or enhancing the performance of the
hardware or software being discussed.

CAUTION: This symbol advises you of actions that could damage equipment
or property.

WARNING: This symbol advises you of actions that could result in harm or
injury to the person performing the task.

HIGH VOLTAGE: This symbol alerts the user they are about to perform an
action involving, either a dangerous level of voltage, or to warn against an
action that could result in damage to devices or electrical shock.

LASER: This symbol alerts the user they are about to perform an action
involving possible exposure to laser light radiation.

GROUNDING: This symbol advises you to pay particular attention to the

grounding instructions for correct device functioning.

ESD: This symbol identifies a procedure that requires you take measures to
prevent Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) e.g., use an ESD wrist strap. Circuit
boards are most at risk. Please follow ESD procedures.

TECHNICAL SUPPORT
Support Through the Website
Datalogic provides several services as well as technical support through its website. Log
on to ([Link]).
For quick access, from the home page click on the search icon , and type in the name of
the product you’re looking for. This allows you access to download Data Sheets, Manu-
als, Software & Utilities, and Drawings.
Hover over the Support & Service menu for access to Services and Technical Support.

Reseller Technical Support

An excellent source for technical assistance and information is an authorized Datalogic
reseller. A reseller is acquainted with specific types of businesses, application software,
and computer systems and can provide individualized assistance.

xiv POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

CHAPTER 1
INTRODUCTION

ABOUT THE READER

The PowerScan family of bar code readers are the ultimate industrial handheld scanners
designed and constructed to withstand the toughest environmental conditions. The
PowerScan 9600 imagers have an ultra-rugged design, an ergonomic shape with well-
balanced weight to reduce operator stress during daily activities and an intuitive aiming
system, allowing the highest first-pass reading rate while reducing unnatural wrist
movement.
The PowerScan 9600 area imagers are available in three different optics, to satisfy any
customer need. The Standard Range optic is ideal for most of the applications requiring
barcode reading at intuitive distance; the High Performance optic adds the capability to
decode high density barcodes together with an increased depth of field on standard 1D/
2D codes; the Document Capture model, available only for the PD96300, is thought for
Wide Angle code reading and Document Capture applications.
The PowerScan 9600 area imagers also feature Datalogic’s exclusive 3 Green Lights
(3GL™) for superior good-read feedback together with a loud beeper and vibration. The
‘Green Spot’ technology directly on the code and dual Good Read LEDs increase visibil-
ity at any angle. All models have multi-interface capabilities featuring the most popular
interfaces: RS-232, USB and offer an optional Ethernet for standard or industrial uses.
Datalogic’s Motionix™ motion-sensing technology detects the natural actions of the
operator to automatically switch the scanner into the desired scanning mode (handheld
or presentation scanning).
The PowerScan 9600 cordless model further enhances the operator efficiency and
safety with Datalogic’s STAR Cordless System™. The Datalogic STAR Cordless System™
for narrow-band radio communications was developed specifically to maximize effi-
ciency and reliability for handheld scanner data collection applications. The PowerScan
PM96XX models are equipped with a new generation of the STAR-System that further
improves the already outstanding features of versatility, ease of use and radio range.
Accurate power management allows long lasting battery life to always guarantee more
than one shift of intensive scanning. The PowerScan 9600 scanner features Datalogic’s
Wireless Charging System. Based on inductive-charging technology, Datalogic’s Wireless
Charging System eliminates battery contacts and pins that often get dirty, bent, or bro-
ken over time – and this removes a key point of failure for devices used in industrial and
retail functions.
The PM96XX series offers two display options: 4 configurable keys and a full 16-key key-
board. This increases interaction between the host and the user allowing a two-way
exchange of information for more reliable and effective communications.
The BC9600 base/charger has a modular design and is available with multiple interface
plug-ins for standard and industrial communication, such as RS-232, USB, Standard
Ethernet and Industrial Ethernet protocols.

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 1

INTRODUCTION

The BC96XX base/charger also includes in one model two different Ethernet connec-
tions: Standard Ethernet and Industrial Ethernet protocols such as Ethernet IP and Prof-
inet.
The table below shows the unique features of each model.
MODEL P/N OPTICAL FEATURE
PD9630-SR Standard Range, standard and low density codes
PD9630-HP High Performance, high standard and low density codes
Document Capture, wide angle, standard and low density code, color sen-
PD9630-DC
sor for image capture
PM96XX-SR Standard Range, standard and low density codes
PM96XX-HP High Performance, High, standard and low density codes

General Features
To read a symbol or capture an image, simply aim the reader and pull the trigger. The
PowerScan™ PD/PM96XX is a powerful omni-directional reader, so the orientation of
the symbol is not important. Datalogic's exclusive patented 'Green Spot' for good-read
feedback helps to improve productivity in noisy environments or in situations where
silence is required.
The PowerScan™ PD/PM96XX reliably decodes all standard 1D (linear) and 2D bar
codes, including GS1 DataBar™ linear codes, Postal Codes (China Post), Stacked Codes
(such as GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked, GS1 DataBar Stacked, GS1 DataBar, Stacked
Omnidirectional). The data stream - acquired from decoding a symbol - is rapidly sent to
the host. The reader is immediately available to read another symbol.

FEATURE DESCRIPTION
To read a symbol or capture an image, you simply aim the
Omni-directional Operat- reader and pull the trigger. Since the PowerScan™ PD/PM96XX
ing is a powerful omni-directional reader, the orientation of the
symbol is not important.
Thanks to powerful algorithms, PowerScan™ PD/PM96XX reli-
ably decodes all major 1D (linear) barcodes, 2D stacked codes
(such as PDF417), 2D matrix symbols (such as DataMatrix),
Decoding
postal codes (such as POSTNET, PLANET). The data stream —
acquired from decoding a symbol — is rapidly sent to the host.
The reader is immediately available to read another symbol.
The string of a decoded code may be processed according to
Formatting and
either a simple or advanced data formatting and be concate-
Concatenating
nated.
PowerScan™ PD/PM96XX can also function as a camera by
Imaging capturing entire images or image portions of labels, signatures,
and other items. Color images are possible with -DC model.
An autoscan command causes the reader to scan continuously
Autoscanning
and to monitor the central zone of its reading area.
Flash technology allows you to upgrade the PowerScan™ PD/
Flash Memory PM96XX reader as new symbologies are supported or as
improved decoding algorithms become available.
The reader can be set up to select and output a subset of data
elements from USA Driver License PDF417 barcodes. This fea-
USA Driver License Pars-
ture can be enabled using either Datalogic Aladdin™ or the bar-
ing
codes in the USA Driver License Parsing Quick Reference Guide
(QRG), available on the Datalogic website.

2 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX
 ABOUT THE READER

PM96XX 4-key and 16-key Models

The PM96XX series offers two display options: 4 configurable keys and a full 16-key key-
board. This increases interaction between the host and the user allowing a two-way
exchange of information for more reliable and effective communications.
The table below illustrates the key functions of the two models.

The 4-key keyboard has two fully configurable generic

Function keys (F1 and F2) and two arrow keys.
These keys are fully customizable to perform specific
tasks (e.g. scrolling the list of items, navigating
menus, etc.).

The 16 keys keyboard is active in numeric data-entry

mode by default. It means you can enter any numeric
combination including '.' (F2 key).
By pressing the yellow arrow key (bottom left corner)
you switch to the alphanumeric keyboard which
enables the T9-type data entry mode (i.e. consecutive
and rapid pressing of the same key makes different
characters appear on the display).
Additional function keys are available:
• F1 key turns ON/OFF the backlight of the key-
board
• F3 key deletes the last character entered
• F4 key clears the entire screen
To send the numeric / alphanumeric string to the host,
press the green Enter key in the lower right corner.

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 3

INTRODUCTION

BATTERY SAFETY (ONLY FOR PM96XX)

To reinstall, charge and/or perform any other action on the battery, follow the instruc-
tions in this manual.

NOTE: Before installing the Battery, read “Battery Safety” on this and the fol-
lowing pages. Datalogic recommends annual replacement of rechargeable bat-
tery packs to ensure maximum performance.

WARNING: Do not discharge the battery using any device except for the reader.
When the battery is used in devices other than the designated product, it may
damage the battery or reduce its life expectancy. If the device causes an
abnormal current to flow, it may cause the battery to become hot, explode or
ignite and cause serious injury.
Lithium-ion battery packs may get hot, explode or ignite and cause serious
injury if exposed to abusive conditions. Be sure to follow the safety warnings
listed below:
• Do not place the battery pack in fire or heat.
• Do not connect the positive terminal and negative terminal of the battery
pack to each other with any metal object (such as wire).
• Do not carry or store the battery pack together with metal objects.
• Do not pierce the battery pack with nails, strike it with a hammer, step on
it or otherwise subject it to strong impacts or shocks.
• Do not solder directly onto the battery pack.
• Do not expose the battery pack to liquids, or allow the battery to get wet.
• Do not apply voltages to the battery pack contacts.
In the event the battery pack leaks and the fluid gets into your eye, do not rub
the eye. Rinse well with water and immediately seek medical care. If left
untreated, the battery fluid could cause damage to the eye.

CAUTION: Always charge the battery at 32° – 104°F (0° - 40°C) temperature
range.
Use only the authorized power supplies, battery pack, chargers, and docks
supplied by your Datalogic reseller. The use of any other power supplies can
damage the device and void your warranty.
Do not disassemble or modify the battery. The battery contains safety and pro-
tection devices, which, if damaged, may cause the battery to generate heat,
explode or ignite.
Do not place the battery in or near fire, on stoves or other high temperature
locations.
Do not place the battery in direct sunlight, or use or store the battery inside
cars in hot weather. Doing so may cause the battery to generate heat, explode
or ignite. Using the battery in this manner may also result in a loss of perfor-
mance and a shortened life expectancy.
Do not place the battery in microwave ovens, high-pressure containers or on
induction cookware.
Immediately discontinue use of the battery if, while using, charging or storing
the battery, the battery emits an unusual smell, feels hot, changes color or
shape, or appears abnormal in any other way.
Do not replace the battery pack when the device is turned on.
Do not remove or damage the battery pack’s label.
Do not use the battery pack if it is damaged in any part.
Battery pack usage by children should be supervised.

CAUTION: Storage of batteries for long time at fully charged status or at fully
discharged status should be avoided.

4 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX
 PROGRAMMING THE READER

CAUTION: Only in case of long storage, to avoid deep discharge of the battery it
is recommended to partially recharge the battery every three months to keep
the charge status at a medium level.
As a reference, run a fast recharge for 20 minutes every three months on
unused products to avoid any performance deterioration of the cell.

As with other types of batteries, Lithium-Ion (LI) batteries will lose capacity over time.
Capacity deterioration is noticeable after one year of service whether the battery is in use
or not. It is difficult to precisely predict the finite life of a LI battery, but cell manufacturers
rate them at 500 charge cycles. In other words, the batteries should be expected to take
500 full discharge / charge cycles before needing replacement. This number is higher if
partial discharging / recharging is adhered to rather than full / deep discharging,
The typical manufacturer advertised useful life of LI batteries is one to three years,
depending on usage and number of charges, etc., after which they should be removed
from service, especially in mission critical applications. Do not continue to use a battery
that is showing excessive loss of capacity, it should be properly recycled / disposed of and
replaced. For most applications, batteries should be replaced after one year of service to
maintain customer satisfaction and minimize safety concerns.
Collect and recycle waste batteries separately from the device in compliance with Euro-
pean Directive 2006/66/EC, 2011/65/EU, 2002/96/EC and 2012/19/EU and subsequent mod-
ifications, US and China regulatory and others laws and regulations about the
environment.

PROGRAMMING THE READER

Configuration Methods
Programming Bar Codes
The reader is factory-configured with a standard set of default features. After scanning the
interface bar code, you can select other options and customize your reader through use of
the instructions and programming bar code labels available in the corresponding features
section for your interface. Customizable settings for many features are found in Configura-
tion Parameters, starting on page 34.
Some programming labels, like “Restore Custom Defaults”, require only the scan of the sin-
gle label to enact the change. Most, however, require the reader to be placed in Program-
ming Mode prior to scanning them. Scan an ENTER/EXIT bar code once to enter
Programming Mode. Once the reader is in Programming Mode, scan a number of parame-
ter settings before scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code a second time, which will then
accept your changes, exit Programming Mode and return the reader to normal operation.
NOTE: There are some exceptions to the typical programming sequence
described above. Please read the description and setting instructions care-
fully when configuring each programmable feature.

Datalogic Aladdin™
Datalogic Aladdin™ is a multi-platform utility program providing a quick and user-friendly
configuration method via the RS-232/USB-COM interface. Aladdin allows you to program
the reader by selecting configuration commands through a user-friendly graphical inter-
face running on a PC. These commands are sent to the reader over the selected communi-
cation interface, or they can be printed as bar codes to be scanned. Aladdin also facilitates
image capturing.
In addition, Aladdin makes it easy to upgrade the handheld’s firmware, to attain the bene-
fits of new reader features. Reference the Datalogic Aladdin™ Online Help for more details.
Aladdin is available for download free of charge on the Datalogic website.

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 5

CHAPTER 2
SETUP

UNPACKING
Check carefully to ensure the reader and any cables or accessories ordered are present
and undamaged. If any damage occurred during shipment, contact "Technical Support"
on page xiv.

SETTING UP THE POWERSCAN™ PD96XX READER

Follow the steps below to connect and get your reader up and communicating with its
host.

1. Connect the Cable to the reader and the Host (see page 6).

2. Configure the Interface (see page 29).

3. Configure the Reader starting page 34 (optional, as needed).

Connect the PowerScan™ by plugging directly into the host device as shown. The power
can also be supplied through an external power supply via the Interface Cable supplied
with a power jack.

CONNECT HOST INTERFACE

Connecting the Cable

The reader kit you ordered to match your interface should provide a compatible cable
for your installation. If this is not so, contact "Technical Support" on page xiv.
Follow the steps below to connect the cable to the reader.
1. Use a screwdriver to open the handle.

6 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX
 CONNECT HOST INTERFACE

2. Insert the circular RJ45 cable (figure A) or use the adapter with non-circular RJ45
cables (figure B).

3. In this case, make sure to insert the adapter with the slot facing up (C). The rib (D)
inside the adapter seat must fit into this slot.

4. Once the cable is properly inserted, close the handle and screw it back into the body.

RS-232 Serial Connection

Turn off power to the terminal/PC and connect the reader to the terminal/PC serial port
via the RS-232 cable as shown in Figure 1. If the terminal will not support POT (Power
Off the Terminal) to supply reader power, use the approved power supply (AC Adapter).
Plug the AC Adapter barrel connector into the socket on the RS-232 cable connector and
the AC Adapter plug into a standard power outlet.
RS-232:The reader can communicate with a standard or Wincor-Nixdorf (W-N) RS-232
host.
RS-232 OPOS:This interface is used for OPOS/UPOS/JavaPOS systems.

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 7

SETUP

USB Connection
Connect the reader to a USB port on the terminal/PC using the correct USB cable for the
interface type you ordered.

USB: Select to communicate either by USB OEM, USB COM STD, or USB Keyboard inter-
face types by scanning the appropriate interface type bar codes available in this manual.
The default interface is USB-KBD, or RS-232-STD.

Keyboard Wedge Connection

The Keyboard Wedge cable has a ‘Y’ connection from the reader. Connect the female to
the male end from the keyboard and the remaining end at the keyboard port at the ter-
minal/PC.

Keyboard Wedge (KBW): When connected using this interface, the host interprets
scanned data as keystrokes and supports several international keyboards (for the Win-
dows® environment). See "Setting Country Mode" on page 52 for a full listing.

NOTE: Specific cables are required for connection to different hosts. The
connections illustrated in the following page are examples only. Actual
connectors may vary from those illustrated, but the steps to connect the
reader remain the same.

8 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX
 CONNECT HOST INTERFACE

Figure 1 - Connection to the Host

RS-232

1
3

USB

1
2

WEDGE

NOTE: Use only CAB-556. Other Wedge cables are not compatible with
PD96XX readers.

CAUTION: To avoid damage to the scanner and/or to the host, first install
correctly the cable into the scanner and then connect the other end of the
cable into the host port of the PC.

ETHERNET

3 1

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 9

SETUP

USING THE POWERSCAN™ PD96XX

The PowerScan™ PD96XX normally functions by capturing and decoding codes. The
reader is equipped with an internal Motionix™ motion-sensing function which activates
the aiming system on device motion. The intelligent aiming system indicates the field of
view which should be positioned over the bar code:
Table 1 - Aiming System

MODEL P/N AIMER PATTERN

PD9630-SR
PD9630-HP

PD9630-DC

Symbologies with smaller bars or elements (mil size) should be read closer to the unit.
Symbologies with larger bars or elements (mil size) should be read farther from the unit.
Successful reading is signaled by an audible tone plus a good-read green spot LED indi-
cator and vibration. Reference the PowerScan™ 9600 Family Product Reference Guide
(PRG) for more information about this feature and other programmable settings.

USING THE POWERSCAN™ PM96XX

The PowerScan™ PM96XX normally functions by capturing and decoding codes. Turn on
the scanner by pressing the trigger for 2 seconds. When the scanner starts up, it
vibrates. After the vibration, the trigger can be released and the startup phase ends.
Table 2 - Aiming System

MODEL P/N AIMER PATTERN

PM96XX-SR
PM96XX-HP

The field of view indicated by the aiming system will be smaller when the reader is
closer to the bar code and larger when it is farther from the code. Symbologies with
smaller elements (mil size) should be read closer to the unit. Symbologies with larger
elements (mil size) should be read farther from the unit.
Successful reading is signaled by an audible tone plus a good-read green spot LED indi-
cator and vibration. Reference the PowerScan™ 9600 Family Product Reference Guide
(PRG) for more information about this feature and other programmable settings.

10 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX
 SETTING UP THE POWERSCAN™ PM96XX READER

SETTING UP THE POWERSCAN™ PM96XX READER

Follow the steps below to connect and get your reader up and communicating with its host.

1. Physically mount the Base station and connect it to the Host as described from
page 14.

2. Charge the reader batteries (see page 11).

3. Link to the Base Station (see page 12).

4. Select the Interface Type (see page 28).

5. Configure the Reader starting on page 34 (optional, depends on settings needed).

NOTE: According to recent modification of Regulation for shipping Li-Ion
based battery packs, the products and their spare battery packs parts are
shipped with a very low residual charge (low state of charge).
Hence the needs:
• that a new product must be fully recharged before starting to use it.
and
• that battery packs of the stocked products PM96xx and spare battery
pack parts must be periodically recharged. For instance, by using a
BC96xx base station powered up with a 12V Datalogic AC/DC adapter
(cod.8-0935) for at least 30 minutes each 3 months.

CHARGING THE BATTERIES

Once the BC96XX is powered, you can charge the reader's batteries. Place the Power-
Scan™ PM96XX into the BC96XX base station. The LEDs on the base station/battery
charger turn green and flash orange / green when recharging begins.
The battery is completely charged when the Reader LED on the base station/battery
charger turns green.
The battery can also be charged using the Multi Battery Charger accessory.

The Battery Status information can be easily retrieved

by doubletapping with your fingers on top of the head
of the scanner

NOTE: The PowerScan PM96XX may get warm during charging: this is nor-
mal and does not mean a malfunction.

NOTE: Before using the battery, read "Battery Safety" page 4. Datalogic
recommends annual replacement of rechargeable battery packs to ensure
maximum performance.

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 11

SETUP

LINKING THE READER

Link Datalogic RF Devices to Base
For RF devices, before configuring the interface it is necessary to link the handheld with
the base.
To link the handheld and the base, press the trigger to wake up the handheld and
mount it into the base.
See the Radio Characteristics table on page 310 for the maximum number of handhelds
that can be simultaneously linked to a single base station.
If the reader was previously linked to another base, you must first press and hold the
button on the base (>5 seconds), then scan the Unlink bar code before re-linking to the
new base.

Unlink

Power Off
Scan the bar code below to shut off power to the handheld until the next trigger pull.

Power Off

Set Date and Time (optional)

1. Scan the Enter/Exit Programming barcode below to set date and time.

ENTER / EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

2. Scan the Set Date barcode + six digits for Year, Month and Day (YYYYMMDD) from
the "Keypad" on page 338.

Set Date

3. Scan Set Time + six digits for Hours, Minutes and Seconds (HHMMSS) from the
"Keypad" on page 338.

Set Time

4. Scan the Enter/Exit Programming barcode to complete the procedure.

12 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX
 USING THE BC96XX BASE STATION

USING THE BC96XX BASE STATION

The BC96XX base station, when paired with one or more PowerScan™ PM96XX readers,
builds a Cordless Reading System for the collection, decoding and transmission of bar
code data. It can be connected to a Host PC via RS232, USB, USB Type C, or Ethernet,
depending on the interchangeable connection module.
With the adoption of the Wireless Power Transfer technology, the base station can
charge the battery of the gun without contacts, with a performance depending on the
power supply type used.
The label on the base station has LED indicators and a touch button. Touch the button
for 2 seconds and all properly configured and switched on scanners (with battery profile
different from Max Autonomy) that are linked to that base station and within the radio
range coverage, will emit a beep and blink within 5 seconds. This feature is useful to:
• verify which scanners are linked to a particular base station;
• detect a scanner forgotten somewhere.
The LEDs signal the BC96XX status, as explained below.

LED STATUS

Solid green: the base station is powered.

Green LED
Blinking: the base station is receiving data

Indicates the state of the battery charge.

Orange slow blinking: battery level is under
50%,
the reader is charging.
Lateral Light
Bands Green slow blinking: battery level is over 50%,
the
reader is charging.
Solid Green: the battery of the reader is fully
charged

• BF LED (red/green): network status;

• LINK LED (yellow/green): link activity;
• SF LED (red/green): module status;
• PWR LED (green): power ON (located on
the connection module this LED is not visi-
Ethernet ble when installed in the cradle).
(Ethernet models only)

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 13

SETUP

MOUNTING INSTRUCTIONS
The base station can be either set on or mounted to a flat surface for desktop usage, or
affixed vertically to a wall. Depending on the model, the appropriate connection mod-
ule is already installed.

Permanent Mounting
For either desktop or wall mounting, the base station can be fastened directly to a flat
surface using screws (not included).

NOTE: When the base station is mounted on vertical surfaces, permanent

mounting is always required.

NOTE: For vertical installation, do not exceed two meters in height.

NOTE: When mounting on drywall, the base station should be screwed to a

wall stud or supporting beam for additional support.

Screw Position Screw Position

Wall Mounting
The base station contains a reversible positioning tab for horizontal or vertical mounting.
Figure 2 - Positioning Tab

Desktop Positioning Tab (Horizontal) Wall Positioning Tab (Vertical)

When shipped, the base station has the positioning tab installed in the Desktop position
(horizontal). For vertical installation, the positioning tab must be rotated.

14 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX
 MOUNTING INSTRUCTIONS

Changing the Orientation of the Positioning Tab:

1. Remove the screw holding the tab in place. Keep the screw for reuse.

2. Carefully lift the tab out.

3. Rotate the tab until you will see "WALL" tooth, put the rotated tab into place and
secure it with the screw.

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 15

SETUP

Portable Desktop Mounting

For desktop mounting, if portability of the base station is required, the mounting plate
can be used. There are two ways this can be done: (1) base station fast release by first
fixing the mounting plate onto a flat surface so the base station can be slid off and on,
or (2) connection module fast release by fixing the mounting plate to the connection
module and then fixing both of them onto a flat surface so only the cradle can be slid off
while the connection module will remain on the desk.

Base Station Fast Release - Mounting the Plate

1. Affix the mounting plate onto the desired mounting surface using four screws
through the holes highlighted in the figure below.

2. Remove the adhesive strips protecting the mounting tabs on the base station.

Adhesive
strips

16 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX
 MOUNTING INSTRUCTIONS

3. Align the base station with the mounting plate until you see the sphere inside the
bigger hole on the left.

4. Move the base station down until the sphere is aligned with the smaller hole.

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 17

SETUP

CONNECTION MODULE FAST RELEASE - MOUNTING THE BRACKET

1. Remove the protective strips.

2. Unscrew the connection module from the base station.

3. Screw the mounting plate to the connection module.

2 3

4. Unlock the lever and remove the connection module from the base station.

5. Screw the connection module and mounting plate sub-assembly to a flat surface
using four screws as shown in the figure below.

Screws Position Screws Position

18 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX
 CONNECTION MODULE FAST RELEASE - MOUNTING THE BRACKET

6. With the lever still unlocked, align the base station with the connection module
until you see the sphere inside the bigger hole on the right.

7. Move the base station up until the sphere is aligned with the smaller hole, then
lock the lever to secure the connection module.

Lock the lever

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 19

SETUP

SYSTEM CONNECTIONS

CAUTION: Connections should always be made with power off.

The BC9630 (BC9600 + CM9630 connection module) provides a multi-interface connec-

tor for connections to a host and a power supply connector for an external power sup-
ply.
To unlock the multi-interface cable, first lift the lever and then extract the cable, as indi-
cated by the label next to the lever.
Figure 3 - BC9630 Connection Module

Unlock label
Multi-interface
cable

Power adapter cable

The BC9631 (BC9600 + CM9631 connection module) provides a single multi-interface

connector. Power is supplied by the host (USB) or by an external power supply con-
nected to the cable.
Figure 4 - BC9631 Connection Module

Power adapter + multi-interface cable

20 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX
 CONNECTING AND DISCONNECTING THE CABLES

CONNECTING AND DISCONNECTING THE CABLES

The BC963X cradle can be connected to a host by means of a multi-interface cable,
which must be simply plugged into the Host connector, visible on the front panel of the
cradle. To disconnect the multi-interface cable and the power adapter cable (for
BC9630), refer to the following figures.

CAUTION: Connections should always be made with power off.

Connecting BC9630 cables

Connect the multi-interface cable first, then connect the power adapter cable. Finally,
power on the cradle.
Figure 5 - Connecting BC9630 cables

After connecting the power supply cable, secure it on the strain relief as shown in the
figure below.

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 21

SETUP

Disconnecting BC9630 cables

To disconnect the cables, power off the base station, unlock the lever and press down
the cable clip using a pen or a similar tool.

1. Power off the cradle and unlock the lever

Unlock the lever

2. Press down the cable clip using a pen or a similar tool.

Press down Cable

the cable clip clip

3. Pull out the multi-interface cable and put the lever back into lock position.

Lock Position

22 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX
 CONNECTING AND DISCONNECTING THE CABLES

Connecting BC9631 multi-interface cable

1. Unscrew the no-tool screw to open the front door.

Unscrew

2. Insert the multi-interface cable.

Insert

3. Close the door and screw it back.

Screw

To disconnect the multi-interface cable, open the front door, pull out the cable and
screw the front door back.

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 23

SETUP

Connecting BC9680 cables

Connect the Ethernet cable and then connect the power adapter cable. Finally, power
on the cradle and lock the power cable on the strain relief.
To disconnect the cables, first unlock the power cable and then pull it out. To disconnect
the Ethernet cable, use a flat screwdriver to unlock the Ethernet clip.

CAUTION: Do not place two base stations too close to each other as shown
in the figure below. Keep at least 5cm of distance between them, in order
to avoid possible interferences and malfunction of the two wireless
charging systems.

24 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX
 CONNECTING THE BASE STATION

CONNECTING THE BASE STATION

The BC96XX can be connected to a terminal, PC or other host device by means of a
multi-interface cable. The following figures show how to connect the cradle to the host
device. Turn off the host before connection and consult the manual for that equipment
(if necessary) before proceeding. Connect the interface cable before applying power to
the cradle.

RS232
BC9630

BC9631

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 25

SETUP

USB
The power supply is optional, the cradle can be powered by the USB port. In this case, the
full charging of an empty battery will take about 16 hours with USB and 6,5 hours with
USB type C at ambient temperature. For intense usage and/or when the system is shut
down during the night, the use of an external power supply is recommended.

BC9630

BC9631

ETHERNET

26 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX
 SYSTEM AND NETWORK LAYOUTS

SYSTEM AND NETWORK LAYOUTS

Stand Alone Layouts

Figure 6 - Single Reader Layout

Figure 7 - Multiple Reader Layout

In stand alone systems, each base station is connected to a single Host.

Figure 8 - Multiple Stand Alone Layouts

Many stand alone connections can operate in the same physical area without interfer-
ence, provided all readers and base stations in the system have different addresses.

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 27

SETUP

BC96XX CONFIGURATION
The BC96XX configuration can be performed in three ways: by using the Datalogic Alad-
din™ software configuration program, by sending configuration strings from the Host PC
via the RS-232 or USB-COM interface or by reading configuration bar codes with the
PowerScan 96XX reader.

Serial Configuration
By connecting the BC96XX to a PC through an RS-232 or USB-COM interface cable it is
possible to send configuration strings from the PC to BC96XX.

Configuration Bar Codes

Link the cradle and the reader using the procedures described in the PowerScan
PM96XX Quick Reference. Once the pairing is complete, you can configure the BC96XX
cradle by reading configuration bar codes in this manual.
To configure the BC96XX using the PowerScan 96XX reader (paired to the cradle with
the Bind command), follow the procedure according to the interface selected.

INTERFACE SELECTION
Upon completing the physical connection between the reader and its host, proceed
directly to the following paragraph "Configuring the Interface" for information and pro-
gramming for the interface type the reader is connected to (for example: RS-232, Key-
board Wedge, USB, etc.) and scan the appropriate bar code in that section to select your
system’s correct interfac5e type.
The reader, depending upon the model, will support one of the following sets of host
interfaces:
• USB (Keyboard, COM, OEM)
• USB Composite (Keyboard + COM)
• USB HID POS
• USB Toshiba TEC
• RS-232 STD
• RS-232 WN
• RS232 OPOS
• Keyboard Wedge
• Datalogic Magellan Scanners' specific interface

28 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX
 CONFIGURING THE INTERFACE

CONFIGURING THE INTERFACE

Scan the programming bar code from the following section which selects the appropri-
ate interface type to match the system the reader will be connected to. Next, proceed to
the corresponding chapter in this manual (also listed in the table) to configure any
desired settings and features associated with that interface.
NOTE: Unlike some other programming features and options, interface
selections require that you scan only one programming bar code label. DO
NOT scan an ENTER/EXIT bar code prior to scanning an interface selection
bar code. Some interfaces require the reader to start in the disabled state
when powered up. If additional reader configuration is desired while in this
state, pull the trigger and hold for 5 seconds. The reader will change to a
state that allows programming with bar codes.

Table 3 - Available Interfaces

USB-OEM

USB-OEM
(can be used for OPOS/UPOS/JavaPOS)
$P,HA45,P
Select USB-OEM

NOTE: If you erroneously read the USB-OEM interface selection code, it is

required to press and hold the trigger to unlock the reader. Then read the correct
interface bar code. This will work only at power-up. Please reconnect the reader
if the unlock is not successful.

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 29

SETUP

Table 4 - Available Interfaces (continued)

SERIAL INTERFACE

RS-232 standard interface

$P,HA05,P
*Not supported on USB only models
Select RS232-STD

RS-232 Wincor-Nixdorf
$P,HA12,P
Select RS232-WN

RS-232 for use with OPOS/UPOS/JavaPOS

$P,HA13,P
Select RS-232 OPOS

USB-COM
(simulates RS-232 standard interface)
$P,HA47,P
Select USB-COM-STDa
a. Download the correct USB Com driver from [Link].

USB FOR TERMINALS

USB Toshiba TEC

$P,HA41,P
Select USB Toshiba TEC

USB HID POS

$P,HA44,P
Select USB HID POS

USB FOR MAGELLAN SCANNERS

USB for Magellans

$P,HA40,P
Select USB Magellan Scanners
ETHERNET

Ethernet Interface
$P,HA19,P
Select Ethernet Interface

30 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX
 CONFIGURING THE INTERFACE

KEYBOARD
USB Keyboard with standard key encoding
$P,HA35,P

Select USB Keyboard

USB Keyboard with alternative key encoding

$P,HA2B,P
Select USB Alternative Keyboard

USB-Composite
(combines USB-KBD emulation and USB-COM
$P,HA4D,P
Select USB-Composite

AT, PS/2 with standard key encoding

$P,HA29,P
Select KBD-AT

AT, PS/2 with alternate key encoding

$P,HA26,P
Select KBD-AT-ALT

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 31

SETUP

CUSTOMIZING CONFIGURATION SETTINGS

Using the Programming Bar Codes

This manual contains feature descriptions and bar codes which allow you to reconfigure
your reader. Some programming bar code labels, like Resetting the Product Configuration
to Defaults, starting on page 33, require only the scan of that single label to enact the
change.
Most of the programming labels in this manual, however, require the reader to be
placed in Programming Mode prior to scanning them. Scan an ENTER/EXIT bar code
once to enter Programming Mode. Once the reader is in Programming Mode, you can
scan a number of parameter settings before scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code a second
time, which will then accept your changes, exit Programming Mode and return the
reader to normal operation.
NOTE: There are some exceptions to the typical programming sequence
described above. Please read the description and setting instructions care-
fully when configuring each given programmable feature.

Datalogic Aladdin™ Utility

Programming can alternatively be performed using the Datalogic Aladdin™ Configura-
tion application which is available for free download from the Datalogic website listed
on the back cover of this manual. This multi-platform utility program allows device con-
figuration using a PC. It communicates to the device using a serial or USB cable and can
also create configuration bar codes to print.
Datalogic Aladdin™ is a multi-platform utility program providing a quick and user-
friendly configuration method via the RS-232/USB-COM interface. The Aladdin utility is
available on the Datalogic website. Aladdin allows you to program the reader by select-
ing configuration commands through a user-friendly graphical interface running on a
PC. These commands are sent to the reader over the selected communication interface,
or they can be printed as bar codes to be scanned.
Aladdin also provides the ability to perform a software upgrade for the connected
device (see the Datalogic Aladdin™ Help On-Line for more details).

Interface Settings
The reader is typically factory-configured with a set of default features standard to the
interface type you ordered. See Appendix B, Standard Defaults.
Global Interface Features, starting on page 36 provides settings configurable by all inter-
face types. If your installation requires you to further customize your reader, you can
select other options through use of the instructions and programming bar codes avail-
able in the appropriate section for your interface.
• "RS-232 Interface" on page 37
• "RS-232/USB-COM Interfaces" on page 42
• RS232 OPOS on page 29
• USB Composite (COM + Keyboard) on page 31
• "Keyboard Interface" on page 50
• "USB-OEM Interface" on page 79

32 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX
 CUSTOMIZING CONFIGURATION SETTINGS

Configuring Other Features

If your installation requires different programming than the standard factory default
settings, the following sections of this manual allow configuration of non-interface-spe-
cific settings you might require:

Configuration Using Bar Codes: General Features includes programming for scanning,
beeper and LED indicators and other such universal settings.

Reading Parameters: Reading Parameters include programming for scanning, beeper

and LED indicators and other universal settings.

1D Symbologies: Includes options concerning the bar code label types (symbologies).
These settings allow you to enable/disable symbologies, set label lengths, require check
digit, etc.

Software Version Transmission

The software version of the device (reader or base station) can be transmitted over the
RS-232, Keyboard and USB interfaces by scanning the following labels.

Transmit Software Version (reader)

Transmit Software Version (base station)

Resetting the Product Configuration to Defaults

Restore Custom Default Configuration
If you aren't sure what programming options are in your reader, or you've changed
some options and want to restore the Custom Default Configuration that may have
been saved in the reader, scan the Restore Custom Default Configuration bar code
below. This will restore the custom configuration for the currently active interface.

NOTE: Custom defaults are based on the interface type. Configure the
reader for the correct interface before scanning this label.

Restore Custom Default Configuration

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 33

CHAPTER 3
CONFIGURATION WITH BAR CODES
This and following sections provide programming bar codes to configure your reader by
changing the default settings. For details about additional methods of programming,
see "Customizing Configuration Settings" on page 32.
NOTE: You must first enable your PowerScan to read bar codes in order to
use this section. If you have not done this, go to Setup, starting on page 6
and complete the appropriate procedure.

CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS
Once the reader is set up, you can change the default parameters to meet your applica-
tion needs. Refer to Standard Defaults, starting on page 317 for initial configuration in
order to set the default values and select the interface for your application.
NOTE: In the following sections, text shown with a green star indicates a
factory default value.
This is an example of a default value.

The following configuration parameters are divided into logical groups, making it easy to
find the desired function based on its reference group.

Interface Configuration:
• RS-232 Standard Settings, starting on page 38
• RS-232/USB-COM Settings, starting on page 43
• Keyboard Interface, starting on page 50
• USB-OEM Interface, starting on page 79

Parameters common to all interface applications:

• Global Interface Features, starting on page 36.
• Data Format, starting on page 81 gives options to control the messages sent to the
Host system by selecting parameters to control the message strings sent to the
handheld (e.g. "Global Prefix/Suffix" on page 82).
• Reading Parameters, starting on page 92 controls various operating modes and
indicators status functioning.

34 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX
 CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS

Symbology-specific parameters:
1D Symbologies, starting on page 111 and 2D Symbologies, starting on page 194 define
options for all symbologies and provides the programming bar codes necessary for con-
figuring these features.
NOTE: You must first enable your reader to read bar codes in order to use
this section. If you have not done this, go to Setup, starting on page 6 and
complete the appropriate procedure.

To program features:
1. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING bar code, available at the top of each pro-
gramming page, when applicable.

2. Scan the bar code to set the desired programming feature. You may need to cover
unused bar codes on the page, and possibly the facing page, to ensure that the
reader reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

3. If additional input parameters are needed, go to Appendix D, and scan the appro-
priate characters from the keypad.
NOTE: Additional information about many features can be found in the
References, starting on page 272.
If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL bar code
to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again from the
beginning.

4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAM-

MING bar code to exit Programming Mode.

For more detailed descriptions, programming information and examples for setting
selected configuration items, see References, starting on page 272.

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 35

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

GLOBAL INTERFACE FEATURES

The following interface features are configurable by all interface types.
To set features specific to your interface, turn to that section of this manual.

Host Commands — Obey/Ignore

This option specifies whether the reader will obey or ignore host commands. When set
to ignore, the reader will ignore all host commands except those necessary for:
• service mode
• flash programming mode
• keeping the interface active
• transmission of labels.

$CIFIH00
Host Commands = Obey
(Do Not Ignore Host Commands)

$CIFIH01

Host Commands = Ignore

USB Suspend Mode

This setting enables/disables the ability of USB interfaces to enter suspend mode.

$CUSSE00

USB Suspend Mode = Disable

$CUSSE01

USB Suspend Mode = Enable

36 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX
CONFIGURATION | RS-232 INTERFACE
Use the programming bar codes in this chapter if modifications to the standard RS-232
interface settings are necessary to meet your system’s requirements. Additional settings
which apply to both the RS-232 and USB interfaces are available in RS-232/USB-COM
Settings, starting on page 43.

SECTION CONTENTS
RS-232 STANDARD SETTINGS starting on page 38

• Baud Rate • Parity

• Data Bits • Handshaking Control
• Stop Bits

Standard Factory Settings

Reference Appendix B, for a listing of standard factory settings.

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 37

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE RS-232 INTERFACE

RS-232 STANDARD SETTINGS

Baud Rate
Baud rate is the number of bits of data transmitted per second. Set the reader's baud
rate to match the baud rate setting of the host device. With an improper baud rate set-
ting, data may not reach the host correctly.

$CR2BA00

Baud Rate = 1200

$CR2BA01

Baud Rate = 2400

$CR2BA02

Baud Rate = 4800

$CR2BA03

Baud Rate = 9600

$CR2BA04

Baud Rate = 19,200

$CR2BA05

Baud Rate = 38,400

$CR2BA06

Baud Rate = 57,600

$CR2BA07

Baud Rate = 115,200

38 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX
RS-232 STANDARD SETTINGS ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Data Bits
This parameter allows the reader to interface with devices requiring a 7-bit or 8-bit
ASCII protocol for sending and receiving data.

$CR2DA00

7 Data Bits

$CR2DA01

8 Data Bits

NOTE: Handheld and base station models support the 8-bit ASCII protocol.
The 7-bit ASCII protocol support is subject to specific firmware release.
If the setting is not supported, the reader will emit three short beeps upon
scanning the label.

Stop Bits
The stop bit(s) at the end of each transmitted character marks the end of transmission
of one character and prepares the receiving device for the next character in the serial
data stream. The number of stop bits selected (one or two) depends on the number the
receiving terminal is programmed to accommodate. Set the number of stop bits to
match host device requirements..

$CR2ST00

1 Stop Bit

$CR2ST01

2 Stop Bits

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 39

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE RS-232 INTERFACE

Parity
This feature specifies parity required for sending and receiving data. A parity check bit is
the most significant bit of each ASCII coded character. Select the parity type according
to host device requirements.
• Select None when no parity bit is required.
• Select Odd parity and the parity bit value is set to 0 or 1, based on data, to ensure
that an odd number of 1 bits are contained in the coded character.
• Select Even parity and the parity bit value is set to 0 or 1, based on data, to ensure
that an even number of 1 bits are contained in the coded character..

$CR2PA00

Parity = None

$CR2PA01

Parity = Even

$CR2PA02

Parity = Odd

40 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX
RS-232 STANDARD SETTINGS ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Handshaking Control
The data interface consists of an RS-232 port designed to operate either with or without
the hardware handshaking lines, Request to Send (RTS), and Clear to Send (CTS). Hand-
shaking Control includes the following options:
• RTS — RTS is asserted during transmissions. CTS is ignored.
• RTS/CTS — RTS is asserted during transmissions. CTS gates transmissions.
• RTS/XON/XOFF — RTS is asserted during transmissions. CTS is ignored. XON and
XOFF gate transmissions.
• RTS On/CTS — RTS is always asserted. CTS gates transmissions.
• RTS/CTS Scan Control — RTS is asserted during transmissions. CTS gates transmis-
sions and controls enable and disable state of reader.

$CR2HC00

Handshaking Control = RTS

$CR2HC01

Handshaking Control = RTS/CTS

$CR2HC02

Handshaking Control = RTS/XON/XOFF

$CR2HC03

Handshaking Control = RTS On/CTS

$CR2HC04

Handshaking Control = RTS/CTS Scan Control

$CR2HC05

Handshaking Control = RTS Off

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 41

CONFIGURATION | RS-232/USB-COM INTERFACES
SECTION CONTENTS
• Intercharacter Delay • ACK NAK Timeout Value
• Beep On ASCII BEL • ACK NAK Retry Count
• Beep On Not on File • ACK NAK Error Handling
• ACK NAK Options • Indicate Transmission Failure
• ACK Character • Disable Character
• NAK Character • Enable Character

Standard Factory Settings

Reference Appendix B, for a listing of standard factory settings.

42 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX
RS-232/USB-COM SETTINGS ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

RS-232/USB-COM SETTINGS

Intercharacter Delay
This parameter specifies the intercharacter delay between the end of one character and
the beginning of the next. The delay can be set within a range of zero (0) to 990 millisec-
onds in 10ms increments. A setting of zero specifies no delay. See "Intercharacter Delay"
on page 274 for more detailed programming instructions.

$CR2IC00

Intercharacter Delay = No Delay

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT bar

code above, then the bar code at left followed by dig-
its from the Alphanumeric characters in Appendix D
representing your desired character(s). End by scan-
Select Intercharacter Delay Setting
ning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.
$CR2IC

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort

and not save the entry string. You can then start
again at the beginning.
CANCEL

00 = No Intercharacter Delay

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 43

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE RS-232/USB-COM INTERFACES

Beep On ASCII BEL

When this parameter is enabled, the reader issues a beep when a <BEL> character is
detected on the RS-232 serial line. <BEL> is issued to gain a user's attention to an illegal
entry or other important event.

$CR2BB00

Beep On ASCII BEL = Disable

$CR2BB01

Beep On ASCII BEL = Enable

Beep On Not on File

This option enables/disables the action of the reader to sound a three beep sequence
upon receiving a Not-On-File (NOF) host command.

$CBPNF00

Beep On Not On File = Disable

$CBPNF01

Beep On Not On File = Enable

44 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX
RS-232/USB-COM SETTINGS ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

ACK NAK Options

This enables/disables the ability of the reader to support the RS-232 ACK/NAK protocol.
When configured, the reader and/or host sends an “ACK” when it receives data prop-
erly, and sends “NAK” when the data is in error.
Options are:
• Disable
• Enable for label transmission — The reader expects an ACK/NAK response from
the host when a label is sent.
• Enable for host-command acknowledge — The reader will respond with ACK/NAK
when the host sends a command.
• Enable for label transmission and host-command acknowledge

$CR2AE00

ACK/NAK Protocol = Disable ACK/NAK

$CR2AE01

ACK/NAK Protocol = Enable for label transmission

$CR2AE02
ACK/NAK Protocol = Enable for host-command
acknowledge

$CR2AE03
ACK/NAK Protocol = Enable for label transmission and
host command acknowledge

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 45

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE RS-232/USB-COM INTERFACES

ACK Character
This setting specifies an ASCII character or hex value to be used as the ACK character.
ASCII characters or any hex value from 0 to 0xFF can be selected. See "ACK Character" on
page 275 for more detailed programming instructions.

NOTE: Setting to previously defined characters such as XON, XOFF, or host

commands conflicts with normal operation of these characters. 8-bit data
is not recognized when the option "Data Bits" on page 39 has been set as 7
Data Bits.

$CR2AC

Select ACK Character Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort

and not save the entry string. You can then start
again at the beginning.
CANCEL

0x06 ‘ACK’ Character

NAK Character
This setting specifies an ASCII character or hex value to be used as the NAK character.
ASCII characters or any hex value from 0 to 0xFF can be selected. See "NAK Character" on
page 276 for more detailed programming instructions

NOTE: Setting to previously defined characters such as XON, XOFF, or host

commands conflicts with normal operation of these characters. 8-bit data
is not recognized when the option "Data Bits" on page 39 has been set as 7
Data Bits.

$CR2NA

Select NAK Character Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort

and not save the entry string. You can then start
again at the beginning.
CANCEL

0x15 ‘NAK’ Character

46 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX
RS-232/USB-COM SETTINGS ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

ACK NAK Timeout Value

This option specifies the amount of time the reader waits for an ACK character from the
host following label transmission. The selectable timeout range is 200 milliseconds to
15,000ms (15 seconds) in 200ms increments. A selection of 0 disables the timeout. See
"ACK NAK Timeout Value" on page 277 for more detailed programming instructions.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT bar

code above, then the bar code at left followed by dig-
its from the Alphanumeric characters in Appendix D
representing your desired character(s). End by scan-
Select ACK NAK Timeout Value Setting
ning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.
$CR2AT

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort

and not save the entry string. You can then start
again at the beginning.
CANCEL

01 ACK NAK Timeout value is 200ms

ACK NAK Retry Count

This feature specifies the number of times the reader retries a label transmission due to
a retry condition. The selectable range is from 1 to 254 retries. A selection of 0 disables
the count, and a selection of 255 specifies unlimited retries. See "ACK NAK Retry Count"
on page 278 for more detailed programming instructions.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT bar

code above, then the bar code at left followed by dig-
its from the Alphanumeric characters in Appendix D
representing your desired character(s). End by scan-
Select ACK NAK Retry Count Setting
ning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.
$CR2AR

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort

and not save the entry string. You can then start
again at the beginning.
CANCEL

03 = 3 Retries

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 47

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE RS-232/USB-COM INTERFACES

ACK NAK Error Handling

This feature specifies the method the reader uses to handle receive errors detected
while waiting for an ACK character from the host.
Options are:
• Ignore errors detected
• Process error as valid ACK character
• Process error as valid NAK character

$CR2EH00

ACK NAK Error Handling = Ignore Errors Detected

$CR2EH01
ACK NAK Error Handling = Process Error as
Valid ACK Character

$CR2EH02
ACK NAK Error Handling = Process Error as
Valid NAK Character

Indicate Transmission Failure

This option enables/disables the reader’s ability to sound an error beep to indicate a
transmission failure while in ACK/NAK mode.

$CR2TF00

Indicate Transmission Failure = Disable Indication

$CR2TF01

Indicate Transmission Failure = Enable Indication

48 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX
RS-232/USB-COM SETTINGS ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Disable Character
Specifies the value of the RS-232 host command used to disable the reader.
ASCII characters or any hex value from 0 to 0xFF can be selected. See "Disable Character"
on page 279 for more detailed programming instructions.

Setting to previously defined characters such as XON, XOFF, or host com-

mands conflicts with normal operation of these characters.

$CR2DC

Select Disable Character Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort

and not save the entry string. You can then start
again at the beginning.
CANCEL

0x44 = Disable Character is ‘D’

Enable Character
Specifies the value of the RS-232 host command used to enable the reader.
ASCII characters or any hex value from 0 to 0xFF can be selected. See "Enable Character"
on page 280for more detailed programming instructions

Setting to previously defined characters such as XON, XOFF, or host com-

mands conflicts with normal operation of these characters.

$CR2EC

Select Enable Character Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort

and not save the entry string. You can then start
again at the beginning.
CANCEL

0x45 = Enable Character is ‘E’

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 49

CONFIGURATION | KEYBOARD INTERFACE
SECTION CONTENTS
COUNTRY MODE starting on page 51

• Setting Country Mode

OTHER KEYBOARD PARAMETERS starting on page 66

• Encoding Type • Keyboard Send Control Characters

• ALT Output Type • Wedge Quiet Interval
• Caps Lock State • Intercharacter Delay
• Numlock • Intercode Delay
• Keyboard Numeric Keypad • USB Keyboard Speed

Use the programming bar codes in this chapter to select options for USB Keyboard and
Wedge Interfaces. Reference Appendix B, for a listing of standard factory settings. Infor-
mation about control character emulation which applies to keyboard interfaces is listed
in Appendix E, Scancode Tables.

50 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX
 SETUP ON PC TO USE ALT UNIVERSAL

COUNTRY MODE
This feature specifies the country/language supported by the keyboard.
The Country Mode setting is ignored if the interface uses alternate key encoding.

SETUP ON PC TO USE ALT UNIVERSAL

1. Open Registry Edit

2. Set EnableHexNumpad to 1 as follows:

3. Reset the PC.

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 51

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE KEYBOARD INTERFACE

Setting Country Mode

$CKBCO00

United States

$CKBCO01

French International (Belgian French)

$CKBCO02

United Kingdom

$CKBCO03

Danish

$CKBCO04

French (France)

$CKBCO05

German

$CKBCO06

Italian

52 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX
COUNTRY MODE ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Setting Country Mode (continued)

$CKBCO07

Norwegian

$CKBCO08

Portuguese (Portugal)

$CKBCO09

Spanish

$CKBCO0A

Swedish

$CKBCO0B

Swiss French

$CKBCO0C

Japanese ASCII

$CKBCO0D

Hungarian

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 53

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE KEYBOARD INTERFACE

Setting Country Mode (continued)

$CKBCO0E

Czech

$CKBCO0F

Slovak

$CKBCO10

Romanian

$CKBCO11

Croatian

$CKBCO12

Polish_214

$CKBCO13

French Canadian Win7

$CKBCO14

Lithuanian

54 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX
COUNTRY MODE ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Setting Country Mode (continued)

$CKBCO17

Vietnamese

$CKBCO18

Russian

$CKBCO19

Arabic 101

$CKBCO1A

Chinese ASCII

$CKBCO1B

Thai-Kedmanee

$CKBCO1C

Albanian

$CKBCO1D

Arabic 102

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 55

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE KEYBOARD INTERFACE

Setting Country Mode (continued)

$CKBCO1E

Arabic 102 AZERTY

$CKBCO1F

Azeri Cyrillic

$CKBCO20

Azeri Latin

$CKBCO21

Belarusian

$CKBCO22

Bosnian Cyrillic

$CKBCO23

Bosnian Latin

$CKBCO24

Bulgarian Cyrillic

56 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX
COUNTRY MODE ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Setting Country Mode (continued)

$CKBCO25

Bulgarian Latin

$CKBCO26

Canadian French (Legacy)

$CKBCO27

Canadian Multilingual

$CKBCO28

Chinese (Simplified)

$CKBCO29

Chinese (Traditional)

$CKBCO2A

Czech Programmers

$CKBCO2B

Czech QWERTY

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 57

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE KEYBOARD INTERFACE

Setting Country Mode (continued)

$CKBCO2C

Dutch Netherlands

$CKBCO2D

Estonian

$CKBCO2E

Faeroese

$CKBCO2F

Finnish

$CKBCO30

French (Canada) 2000/XP

$CKBCO31

French (Canada) 95/98

$CKBCO32

Galician

58 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX
COUNTRY MODE ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Setting Country Mode (continued)

$CKBCO33

Greek

$CKBCO34

Greek Latin

$CKBCO35

Greek Polytonic

$CKBCO36

Greek220

$CKBCO37

Greek220 Latin

$CKBCO38

Greek319

$CKBCO39

Greek319 Latin

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 59

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE KEYBOARD INTERFACE

Setting Country Mode (continued)

$CKBCO3A

Hebrew Israel

$CKBCO3B

Hungarian_101KEY

$CKBCO3C

Icelandic

$CKBCO3D

Irish

$CKBCO3E

Italian_142

$CKBCO3F

Japanese (Shift-JIS)

$CKBCO40

Kazakh

60 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX
COUNTRY MODE ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Setting Country Mode (continued)

$CKBCO41

Korean (Hangul)

$CKBCO42

Korean ASCII

$CKBCO43

Kyrgyz Cyrillic

$CKBCO44

Latin America

$CKBCO45

Latvian

$CKBCO46

Latvian QWERTY

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 61

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE KEYBOARD INTERFACE

Setting Country Mode (continued)

$CKBCO48

Macedonian -FYROM

$CKBCO49

Maltese_47KEY

$CKBCO4A

Mongolian-Cyrillic

$CKBCO4B

Polish Programmer

$CKBCO4C

Portuguese Brazil

$CKBCO4D

Portuguese Brazilian ABNT

$CKBCO4E

Portuguese Brazilian ABNT2

62 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX
COUNTRY MODE ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Setting Country Mode (continued)

$CKBCO4F

Romanian Legacy

$CKBCO50

Romanian Programmer

$CKBCO51

Romanian Standard

$CKBCO52

Russian Typewriter

$CKBCO53

Serbian Cyrillic

$CKBCO54

Serbian Latin

$CKBCO55

Slovak QWERTY

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 63

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE KEYBOARD INTERFACE

Setting Country Mode (continued)

$CKBCO56

Slovenian

$CKBCO57

Spanish Variation

$CKBCO58

Swiss German

$CKBCO59

Tatar

$CKBCO5A

Turkish F

$CKBCO5B

Turkish Q

$CKBCO5C

Ukrainian

64 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX
COUNTRY MODE ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Setting Country Mode (continued)

$CKBCO5D

US Dvorak

$CKBCO5E

US Dvorak Left Hand

$CKBCO5F

US Dvorak Right Hand

$CKBCO60

US English (Mac)

$CKBCO61

US English (North American)

$CKBCO62

US International

$CKBCO63

Uzbek Cyrillic

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 65

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE KEYBOARD INTERFACE

OTHER KEYBOARD PARAMETERS

Encoding Type

$CENCO00

Encoding Type = Don’t Use Encoding

$CENCO03

Encoding Type = UTF_8

$CENCO04

Encoding Type = Windows 874

$CENCO05

Encoding Type = Windows 932

$CENCO06

Encoding Type = Windows 936

$CENCO07

Encoding Type = Windows 949

$CENCO08

Encoding Type = Windows 950

66 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX
OTHER KEYBOARD PARAMETERS ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Encoding Type (continued)

$CENCO09

Encoding Type = Windows 1250

$CENCO0A

Encoding Type = Windows 1251

$CENCO0B

Encoding Type = Windows 1252

$CENCO0C

Encoding Type = Windows 1253

$CENCO0D

Encoding Type = Windows 1254

$CENCO0E

Encoding Type = Windows 1255

$CENCO0F

Encoding Type = Windows 1256

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 67

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE KEYBOARD INTERFACE

Encoding Type (continued)

$CENCO10

Encoding Type = Windows 1257

$CENCO11

Encoding Type = Windows 1258

$CENCO12

Encoding Type = Windows 20866

$CENCO31

Encoding Type = Windows 54936

$CENCO13

Encoding Type = ISO 8859-1

$CENCO14

Encoding Type = ISO 8859-2

$CENCO15

Encoding Type = ISO 8859-3

68 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX
OTHER KEYBOARD PARAMETERS ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Encoding Type (continued)

$CENCO16

Encoding Type = ISO 8859-4

$CENCO17

Encoding Type = ISO 8859-5

$CENCO18

Encoding Type = ISO 8859-6

$CENCO19

Encoding Type = ISO 8859-7

$CENCO1A

Encoding Type = ISO 8859-8

$CENCO1B

Encoding Type = ISO 8859-9

$CENCO1C

Encoding Type = ISO 8859-10

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 69

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE KEYBOARD INTERFACE

Encoding Type (continued)

$CENCO1D

Encoding Type = ISO 8859-11

$CENCO1E

Encoding Type = ISO 8859-13

$CENCO1F

Encoding Type = ISO 8859-14

$CENCO20

Encoding Type = ISO 8859-15

$CENCO21

Encoding Type = ISO 8859-16

$CENCO22

Encoding Type = MS-DOS 437

$CENCO23

Encoding Type = MS-DOS 737

70 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX
OTHER KEYBOARD PARAMETERS ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Encoding Type (continued)

$CENCO24

Encoding Type = MS-DOS 775

$CENCO25

Encoding Type = MS-DOS 850

$CENCO26

Encoding Type = MS-DOS 852

$CENCO27

Encoding Type = MS-DOS 855

$CENCO28

Encoding Type = MS-DOS 857

$CENCO29

Encoding Type = MS-DOS 860

$CENCO2A

Encoding Type = MS-DOS 861

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 71

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE KEYBOARD INTERFACE

Encoding Type (continued)

$CENCO2B

Encoding Type = MS-DOS 862

$CENCO2C

Encoding Type = MS-DOS 863

$CENCO2D

Encoding Type = MS-DOS 865

$CENCO2E

Encoding Type = MS-DOS 866

$CENCO2F

Encoding Type = MS-DOS 869

$CENCO30

Encoding Type = Mac CP10000

72 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX
OTHER KEYBOARD PARAMETERS ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

ALT Output Type

This option specifies the encode type of ALT Mode when the reader sends Output Key-
board Data in Alt Mode. (Be aware that the reader may switch automatically between
ALT mode & Normal Keyboard Scancode, to correctly display some characters that are
not present in the current Keyboard Country).

$COCPT00
ALT Output Type = ALT Codepage
(use on non Unicode application: Notepad)

$COCPT01
ALT Output Type = ALT Unicode
(use on Unicode application: Word)

$COCPT02
ALT Output Type = ALT Universal
(Use for all)

$COCPT03

ALT Output Type = ALT Unicode for Linux

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 73

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE KEYBOARD INTERFACE

Caps Lock State

This option specifies the format in which the reader sends character data. This applies
to Keyboard Wedge interfaces. This does not apply when an alternate key encoding key-
board is selected. This does not apply to USB Keyboard.

$CKBCL00

Caps Lock State = Caps Lock OFF

$CKBCL01

Caps Lock State = Caps Lock ON

$CKBCL02

Caps Lock State = AUTO Caps Lock Enable

Numlock
This option specifies the setting of the Numbers Lock (Numlock) key while in Keyboard
Wedge interface. This only applies to alternate key encoding interfaces. It does not
apply to USB Keyboard.

$CKBNL00

Numlock = Numlock key unchanged

$CKBNL01

Numlock = Numlock key toggled

74 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX
OTHER KEYBOARD PARAMETERS ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Keyboard Numeric Keypad

This feature specifies if numeric characters will be sent using the standard keys or the
numeric keypad.

$CKBKP00

Keyboard Numeric Keypad = Standard Keys

$CKBKP01

Keyboard Numeric Keypad = Numeric Keypad

Keyboard Send Control Characters

This feature is used by the Keyboard Wedge and USB Keyboard interfaces. It specifies
how the reader transmits ASCII control characters to the host. Reference Appendix E
Scancode Tables for more information about control characters.
Options are as follows:

Send Ctrl+Key : ASCII characters from 00H to 0x1FH inclusive are transmitted in the
format Ctrl+Key. Special keys are available in the range from 81H to A1.

Send Ctrl+Shift+Key : The behavior is the same as above, but control keys are sent in
the format Ctrl+Shift+Keys.

Send Special Function Key : Send characters between 00H and 1FH according to the
special function key mapping table (see "Interface Type PC AT PS/2 Alt Mode or USB-Key-
board Alt Mode" on page 343). This is used to send keys that are not in the normal ASCII
set. A unique set is provided for each available scancode set.

$CKBSC00

Keyboard Send Control Characters = Send Ctrl+Key

$CKBSC01

Keyboard Send Control Characters = Send Ctrl+Shift+Key

$CKBSC02
Keyboard Send Control Characters = Send Special Function
Key

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 75

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE KEYBOARD INTERFACE

Wedge Quiet Interval

This option specifies the amount of time to look for keyboard activity before the reader
breaks the keyboard connection in order to transmit data to host. The selectable range
for this feature is from 0 to 990ms in 10ms increments. See "Wedge Quiet Interval" on
page 281 for more detailed programming instructions.

NOTE: This feature applies ONLY to the Keyboard Wedge interface.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT bar

code above, then the bar code at left followed by dig-
its from the Alphanumeric characters in Appendix D,
Keypad, representing your desired character(s). End
Select Wegde Quiet Interval Setting
by scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.
$CKBQI

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort

and not save the entry string. You can then start
again at the beginning.
CANCEL

10 = Quiet Interval of 100 msec

Intercharacter Delay
This parameter specifies the intercharacter delay between the end of one character and
the beginning of the next. The delay can be set within a range of zero (0) to 990 millisec-
onds in 10ms increments. A setting of zero specifies no delay. See "Intercharacter Delay"
on page 282 for more detailed programming instructions.

$CR2IC00

Intercharacter Delay = No Delay

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT bar

code above, then the bar code at left followed by dig-
its from the Alphanumeric characters in Appendix D,
Keypad, representing your desired character(s). End
Select Intercharacter Delay Setting
by scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.
$CR2IC

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort

and not save the entry string. You can then start
again at the beginning.
CANCEL

00 = No Intercharacter Delay

76 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX
OTHER KEYBOARD PARAMETERS ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Intercode Delay
Specifies the delay between labels transmitted to the host for this interface. The select-
able range for this feature is from 0 to 99 seconds. See "Intercode Delay" on page 283 for
more detailed programming instructions

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO-

GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar
code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanu-
meric characters in Appendix D, Keypad represent-
Set Intercode Delay ing your desired character(s). End by scanning the
$CKBID ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort

and not save the entry string. You can then start
again at the beginning.
CANCEL

00 = No Wedge Intercode Delay

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 77

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE KEYBOARD INTERFACE

USB Keyboard Speed

This option specifies the USB poll rate for a USB Keyboard.

NOTE: This feature applies ONLY to the USB Keyboard interface.

$CKBSP01

USB Keyboard Speed = 1ms

$CKBSP02

USB Keyboard Speed = 2ms

$CKBSP03

USB Keyboard Speed = 3ms

$CKBSP05

USB Keyboard Speed = 5ms

$CKBSP07

USB Keyboard Speed = 7ms

$CKBSP0A

USB Keyboard Speed = 10ms

78 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX
CONFIGURATION | USB-OEM INTERFACE
SECTION CONTENTS

• USB-OEM Device Usage

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 79

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE USB-OEM INTERFACE

USB-OEM Device Usage

The USB-OEM protocol allows for the reader to be identified as one of two different
types of bar code reader. Depending on what other reader you may already have con-
nected to a USB-OEM POS, you may need to change this setting to enable all devices to
communicate.
Options are:
• Tabletop Scanner
• Handheld Scanner

NOTE: This feature is not compatible with Multiple Labels Reading in a Vol-
ume.

$CIBUT00

USB-OEM Device Usage = Tabletop Scanner

$CIBUT01

USB-OEM Device Usage = Handheld Scanner

80 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX
CONFIGURATION | DATA FORMAT
SECTION CONTENTS
GLOBAL SETTINGS starting on page 82

• Global Prefix/Suffix • Global AIM ID

• Case Conversion • GS1-128 AIM ID
• Character Conversion

LABEL ID starting on page 85

• Label ID: Pre-loaded Sets • Label ID Control

• Label ID: Set Individually Per Symbology • Label ID Symbology Selection

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 81

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE DATA FORMAT

GLOBAL SETTINGS

Global Prefix/Suffix
Up to 20 ASCII characters may be added as a prefix (in a position before the bar code
data) and/or as a suffix (in a position following the bar code data). See page 285 in “Ref-
erences” for more detailed programming instructions.

To configure, scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING

MODE bar code above, then the bar code at right fol-
lowed by the digits from the Alphanumeric charac-
ters in Appendix D, Keypad representing your desired
character(s). End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar Set Global Prefix
code. $CLFPR

To configure, scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING

MODE bar code above, then the bar code at left fol-
lowed by the digits from the Alphanumeric charac-
ters in Appendix D, Keypad representing your
Set Global Suffix desired character(s). End by scanning the ENTER/
$CLFSU EXIT bar code.

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort

and not save the entry string. You can then start
again at the beginning.
CANCEL

No Global Prefix

Global Suffix = 0x0D(CR)

82 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX
GLOBAL SETTINGS ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Case Conversion
This feature allows conversion of the case of all alphabetic characters to upper or lower
case.

NOTE: Case conversion affects ONLY scanned bar code data, and does not
affect Label ID, Prefix, Suffix, or other appended data.

$CLFCA00

Case Conversion = Disable (no case conversion)

$CLFCA01

Case Conversion = Convert to upper case

$CLFCA02

Case Conversion = Convert to lower case

Character Conversion
Character conversion is an eight byte configuration item. The eight bytes are 4 character
pairs represented in hexadecimal ASCII values. The first character in the pair is the char-
acter that will be converted. The second character in the pair is the character to convert
to. If the character to convert in a pair is FF, then no conversion is done. See page 291 in
“References” for more detailed programming instructions.

To configure, scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING

MODE bar code above, then the bar code at left fol-
lowed by the digits from the Alphanumeric charac-
ters in Appendix D, Keypad representing your
Configure Character Conversion desired character(s). End by scanning the ENTER/
$CLFCH EXIT bar code.

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort

and not save the entry string. You can then start
again at the beginning.
CANCEL

0xFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
(no character conversion)

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 83

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE DATA FORMAT

Global AIM ID
NOTE: This feature enables/disables addition of AIM IDs for all symbology
types.

AIM label identifiers (as opposed to custom characters you select yourself as with label
identifiers) can be included with scanned bar code data. See page 286 for more detailed
programming instructions.

$CAIEN00

Global AIM ID = Disable

$CAIEN01

Global AIM ID = Enable

GS1-128 AIM ID
If Global AIM ID is disabled, the AIM ID for GS1-128 can be enabled/disabled inde-
pendently. The AIM ID for GS1-128 is a ]C1, ]C2.
AIM IDs for other symbologies can be enabled/disabled independently as well. Contact
Customer Support for assistance.

$CU8AI00

Global AIM ID = Disable

$CU8AI01

Global AIM ID = Enable

84 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX
LABEL ID ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

LABEL ID
A Label ID is a customizable code of up to three ASCII characters (each can be one of hex
0x01-0xFF), used to identify a bar code (symbology) type. It can be appended previous
to or following the transmitted bar code data depending upon how this option is
enabled. This feature provides options for configuring custom Label IDs as a pre-loaded
set (see Label ID: Pre-loaded Sets below) or individually per symbology (see "Label ID:
Set Individually Per Symbology" on page 86). If you wish to program the reader to always
include an industry standard label identifier for ALL symbology types, see the previous
feature "Global AIM ID" on page 84.

Label ID: Pre-loaded Sets

The reader supports two pre-loaded sets of Label IDs, the USA set and the EU set. See
"Label ID: Pre-loaded Sets" on page 287 for more information concerning the pre-loaded
sets that are provided.
CAUTION: When changing from one Label ID set to another, all other reader
configuration settings, including the host interface type, will be erased and
set to the factory defaults. Any custom configuration or custom defaults
will be lost.

$AE

Label ID Pre-loaded Set = USA Set

$Ae

Label ID Pre-loaded Set = EU Set

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 85

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE DATA FORMAT

Label ID: Set Individually Per Symbology

This feature configures a Label ID individually for a single symbology.
NOTE: This setting requires the scanning of bar codes from multiple sec-
tions. See "Label ID: Set Individually Per Symbology" on page 289 for more
detailed programming instructions.

Label ID Control
This option controls whether a Label ID is disabled, or sent as a prefix or suffix for a
given symbology type.

$CIDCO00

Label ID Transmission = Disable

$CIDCO01

Label ID Transmission = Enable as Prefix

$CIDCO02

Label ID Transmission = Enable as Suffix

86 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX
LABEL ID ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Label ID Symbology Selection

This option selects the symbology for which a Label ID is to be configured. See "Label ID:
Set Individually Per Symbology" on page 289 for full instructions.

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort

and not save the entry string. You can then start
again at the beginning.
CANCEL

$CABID

Set UPC-A Label ID Character(s)

$CA2ID

Set UPC-A/P2 Label ID Character(s)

$CA5ID

Set UPC-A/P5 Label ID Character(s)

$CEBID

Set UPC-E Label ID Character(s)

$CE2ID

Set UPC-E/P2 Label ID Character(s)

$CE5ID

Set UPC-E/P5 Label ID Character(s)

$C3BID

Set EAN-13 Label ID Character(s)

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 87

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE DATA FORMAT

Label ID Symbology Selection (continued)

$C32ID

Set EAN-13/P2 Label ID Character(s)

$C35ID

Set EAN-13/P5 Label ID Character(s)

$CISID

Set ISBN Label ID Character(s)

$CINID

Set ISSN Label ID Character(s)

$C8BID

Set EAN-8 Label ID Character(s)

$C82ID

Set EAN-8 Label ID Character(s)

$C85ID

Set EAN-8 Label ID Character(s)

$C4BID

Set GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional Label ID Character(s)

88 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX
LABEL ID ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Label ID Symbology Selection (continued)

$CXBID

Set GS1 DataBar Expanded Label ID Character(s)

$CLBID

Set GS1 DataBar Limited Label ID Character(s)

$CC3ID

Set Code 39 Label ID Character(s)

$CP3ID

Set Code 32 Label ID Character(s)

$CCCID

Set Code 39 CIP HR Label ID Character(s)

$CC8ID

Set Code 128 Label ID Character(s)

$CU8ID

Set Code GS1-128 Label ID Character(s)

$CI2ID

Set Interleaved 2 of 5 Label ID Character(s)

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 89

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE DATA FORMAT

Label ID Symbology Selection (continued)

$CHRID

Set Interleaved 2 of 5 CIP HR Label ID Character(s)

$CD2ID

Datalogic 2 of 5 Label ID Character(s)

$CS2ID

Standard 2 of 5 Label ID Character(s)

$CU2ID

Industrial 2 of 5 Label ID Character(s)

$CIAID

IATA Label ID Character(s)

$CCBID

Codabar Label ID Character(s)

$CACID

ABC Codabar Label ID Character(s)

$CI8ID
ISBT 128 Label ID Character(s)
(single and concatenated)

90 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX
LABEL ID ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Label ID Symbology Selection (continued)

$CC1ID

Code 11 Label ID Character(s)

$CMSID

MSI Label ID Character(s)

$CPLID

Plessey Label ID Character(s)

$CALID

Anker Plessey Label ID Character(s)

$CM2ID

Set Matrix 2 of 5 Label ID Character(s)

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 91

CONFIGURATION | READING PARAMETERS
SECTION CONTENTS
SCANNING FEATURES starting on page 93

• Scan Mode • Stand Mode/Object Detection Sensitivity

• Scanning Active Time • Stand Mode/Object Detection Illumination Off
• Flash On Time Time
• Flash Off Time • Illumination Intensity
• Double Read Timeout • Corded Stand Mode
• Stand Detection Behavior (Desk only) • Corded Stand Mode
• Stand Mode/Object Detection Indication (Stand • Dock Detection Beep
Mode Flash)

LED AND BEEPER INDICATORS starting on page 101

• Power On Alert • Good Read Beeper Volume / Vibration

• Good Read Beep Type • Vibration Feedback for Good Read
• Good Read Beep Frequency
• Good Read Beep Length
• RGB Good Read Enable • Good Read: When to Indicate
• RGB Good Read Color • Green Spot Duration
• Good Read LED Duration

CAMERA CONTROL starting on page 108

• Aiming Pointer • Image Capture

• Pick Mode • Multiple Labels Ordering by Code Symbology
• Pick Mode • Multiple Labels Ordering by Code Length
• Mobile Phone Mode

92 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX
SCANNING FEATURES ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

SCANNING FEATURES

Scan Mode
Selects the reader’s scan operating mode. See page 292 in “References” for descriptions.
3

$CSNRM00

Scan Mode = Trigger Single

$CSNRM01

Scan Mode = Trigger Hold Multiple

$CSNRM02

Scan Mode = Trigger Pulse Multiple

$CSNRM03

Scan Mode = Flashing

$CSNRM04

Scan Mode = Always On

$CSNRM05

Scan Mode = Object Detection

$CSNRM07

Scan Mode = Retained Trigger hold multiple

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 93

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE READING PARAMETERS

Scanning Active Time

This setting specifies the amount of time that the reader stays in scan ON state once the
state is entered. The range for this setting is from 1 to 255 seconds in 1-second incre-
ments. See page 294 in “References” for further description of this feature.

$CSNET03

Scanning Active Time = 3 seconds

$CSNET05

Scanning Active Time = 5 seconds

$CSNET08

Scanning Active Time = 8 seconds

Flash On Time
This feature specifies the ON time for the indicator LED while in Flash Mode. The select-
able range is 100 to 9,900 milliseconds (0.1 to 9.9 seconds), in 100 millisecond incre-
ments. See page 296 in “References” for detailed information on setting this feature.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO-

GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar
code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanu-
meric characters in Appendix D, Keypad represent-
Select Flash ON Time Setting ing your desired character(s). End by scanning the
$CSNFN ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort

and not save the entry string. You can then start
again at the beginning.
CANCEL

10 = Flash is ON for 1 Second

94 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX
SCANNING FEATURES ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Flash Off Time

This feature specifies the OFF time for the indicator LED while in Flash Mode. The select-
able range is 100 to 9,900 milliseconds (0.1 to 9.9 seconds), in 100 millisecond incre-
ments. See page 297 in “References” for detailed information on setting this feature.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO-

GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar
code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanu-
meric characters in Appendix D, Keypad represent-
Select Flash OFF Time Setting ing your desired character(s). End by scanning the
$CSNFF ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort

and not save the entry string. You can then start
again at the beginning.
CANCEL

06 = Flash is OFF for 600ms

Double Read Timeout

Double Read Timeout prevents a double read of the same label by setting the minimum
time allowed between reads of labels of the same symbology and data. If the unit reads
a label and sees the same label again within the specified timeout, the second read is
ignored. Double Read Timeout does not apply to scan modes that require a trigger pull
for each label read.

$CSNDR0A

Double Read Timeout = 0.1 Second

$CSNDR14

Double Read Timeout = 0.2 Second

$CSNDR28

Double Read Timeout = 0.4 Second

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 95

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE READING PARAMETERS

Double Read Timeout (continued)

$CSNDR3C

Double Read Timeout = 0.6 Second

$CSNDR50

Double Read Timeout = 0.8 Second

$CSNDR64

Double Read Timeout = 1 Second

96 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX
SCANNING FEATURES ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Stand Detection Behavior (Desk only)

Specifies the behavior of the reader when stationary in a stand.
Below are further options concerning Stand Operation.
Ignore Autorecognition: Disables mode switching when the reader is placed in a stand.
Switch to Stand Mode/Object Detection: Automatically switches the reader to Stand
Mode/Object Detection when the reader is placed in the stand.
Switch to Always On: Automatically switches the reader to Always On mode when the
reader is placed in the stand.
Switch to Flashing: Automatically switches the reader to Flash Mode when the reader
is placed in the stand.

$CSMSD00
Stand/Base Detection Behavior = Ignore Autorecognition
(do not change behavior)

$CSMSD01
Stand/Base Detection Behavior =
Switch to Stand Mode/Object Detection

$CSMSD02

Stand/Base Detection Behavior = Switch to Always On

$CSMSD03

Stand/Base Detection Behavior = Switch to Flashing

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 97

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE READING PARAMETERS

Stand Mode/Object Detection Indication (Stand Mode Flash)

This operation is useful for indicating when the reader is in Stand Mode. If enabled, the
blue indicator will blink when Stand Mode scanning is active.

$CSMFL00

Stand Mode/Object Detection Indication = Disable

$CSMFL01

Stand Mode/Object Detection Indication = Enable

Stand Mode/Object Detection Sensitivity

Sets the sensitivity level for stand mode/object detection wakeup. Choices are low,
medium and high.

$CSMSE00

Stand/Base Detection Sensitivity = Low

$CSMSE01

Stand/Base Detection Sensitivity = Medium

$CSMSE02

Stand/Base Detection Sensitivity = High

98 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX
SCANNING FEATURES ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Stand Mode/Object Detection Illumination Off Time

Specifies the amount of time reader illumination stays off after pulling the trigger when
in Stand Mode/Object Detection. The configurable range is 01 to 32 by 01 in increments
of 500ms (500ms to 16 seconds).

To configure, scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING

MODE bar code above, then the bar code at left fol-
lowed by the digits from the Alphanumeric charac-
ters in Appendix D, Keypad representing your
Set Illumination OFF Time desired character(s). End by scanning the ENTER/
$CSNTM EXIT bar code.

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort

and not save the entry string. You can then start
again at the beginning.
CANCEL

04 = Illumination OFF Time 1 second

Illumination Intensity
With the following settings the illumination intensity can be reduced if needed. Not all
hardware versions support this function. Please contact Datalogic Technical Support for
more information.

$CIPWL64

Illumination Intensity and Frequency = Full Intensity

$CIPWL32

Illumination Intensity and Frequency = Medium Intensity

$CIPWL19

Illumination Intensity and Frequency = Low Intensity

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 99

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE READING PARAMETERS

Corded Stand Mode

This parameter sets the Stand Mode operation for corded models only.

$CSMVS00

Corded Stand Mode = Disable

$CSMVS01

Corded Stand Mode = Generic Stand

Dock Detection Beep

If enabled, when the Handheld reader is placed in a dock (base station or corded stand),
it will beep.

$CDDBE00

Dock Detection Beep = Disable

$CDDBE01

Dock Detection Beep = Enable

100 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

LED AND BEEPER INDICATORS ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

LED AND BEEPER INDICATORS

Power On Alert
Disables or enables the indication (from the Beeper) that the reader is receiving power.

$CBPPU00

Power On Alert = Disable (No Audible Indication)

$CBPPU01

Power On Alert = Power-up Beep

Good Read Beep Type

Specifies whether the good read beep has a mono or bitonal beep sound.

$CBPTY00

Good Read Beep Type = Mono

$CBPTY01

Good Read Beep Type = Bitonal

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 101

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE READING PARAMETERS

Good Read Beep Frequency

Adjusts the good read beep to sound at a selectable low, medium or high frequency,
selectable from the list below. (Controls the beeper’s pitch/tone.)

$CBPFR00

Good Read Beep Frequency = Low

$CBPFR01

Good Read Beep Frequency = Medium

$CBPFR02

Good Read Beep Frequency = High

102 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

LED AND BEEPER INDICATORS ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Good Read Beep Length

$CBPLE06

Good Read Beep Length = 60 msec

$CBPLE08

Good Read Beep Length = 80 msec

$CBPLE0A

Good Read Beep Length = 100 msec

$CBPLE0C

Good Read Beep Length = 120 msec

$CBPLE0E

Good Read Beep Length = 140 msec

$CBPLE10

Good Read Beep Length = 160 msec

$CBPLE12

Good Read Beep Length = 180 msec

$CBPLE14

Good Read Beep Length = 200 msec

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 103

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE READING PARAMETERS

Good Read Beeper Volume / Vibration

Selects the beeper volume (loudness) upon a good read beep. There are three select-
able volume levels.
In addition to three selectable volume levels, the user can also activate a vibration feed-
back for good read.

$CBPVO00

Good Read Beeper Volume = Beeper Off

$CBPVO01

Good Read Beeper Volume = Low

$CBPVO02

Good Read Beeper Volume = Medium

$CBPVO03

Good Read Beeper Volume = High

Vibration Feedback for Good Read

$CVBGE01

Vibration Feedback for Good Read = Enable Vibration

$CVBGE00

Vibration Feedback for Good Read = Disable Vibration

104 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

LED AND BEEPER INDICATORS ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

RGB Good Read Enable

Specifies whether the RGB good read indicator is enabled or disabled.

$CRBGE00

RGB Good Read = Disable

$CRBGE01

RGB Good Read = Enable

RGB Good Read Color

Selects the good read LED color.

$CRBCL00

RGB Good Read Color = RED

$CRBCL01

RGB Good Read Color = GREEN

$CRBCL02

RGB Good Read Color = BLUE

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 105

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE READING PARAMETERS

Good Read LED Duration

This feature specifies the amount of time that the Good Read LED remains on following
a good read. The good read LED on time can be set within a range of 100 milliseconds to
25,500 milliseconds (0.1 to 25.5 seconds) in 100ms increments. A setting of 00 keeps
the LED on until the next trigger pull.
See page 298 in “References” for detailed instructions and examples for setting this fea-
ture.

$CLAGL00
Good Read LED Duration Setting =
Keep LED on until next trigger pull

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO-

GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar
code at left followed by three digits from the Alpha-
numeric characters in Appendix D, Keypad repre-
Select Good Read LED Duration Setting senting your desired character(s). End by scanning
$CLAGL the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort

and not save the entry string. You can then start
again at the beginning.
CANCEL

003 = Good Read LED stays on for 300 msec.

NOTE: Indicators are dimmed during sleep.

106 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

LED AND BEEPER INDICATORS ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Good Read: When to Indicate

This feature specifies when the reader will provide indication (beep and/or flash its
green LED) upon successfully reading a bar code.

$CBPIN00

Indicate Good Read = After Decode

$CBPIN01

Indicate Good Read = After Transmit

$CBPIN02
Indicate Good Read =
After CTS goes inactive then active

Green Spot Duration

Specifies the duration of the good read pointer beam after a good read.

$CLSSP00

Green Spot Duration = Disable (Green Spot is Off)

$CLSSP01

Green Spot Duration = Short (300 msec)

$CLSSP02

Green Spot Duration = Medium (500 msec)

$CLSSP03

Green Spot Duration = Long (800 msec)

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 107

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE READING PARAMETERS

CAMERA CONTROL

Aiming Pointer
Enables/disables the aiming pointer for all symbologies.

$CTAAP00

Aiming Pointer = Disable

$CTAAP01

Aiming Pointer = Enable

$CTAAP02

Aiming Pointer = Green Spot

Pick Mode
Specifies the ability of the reader to decode labels only when they are close to the cen-
ter of the aiming pattern. This allows the reader to accurately target labels when they
are placed close together, such as on a pick sheet.

$CSNPM00

Pick Mode = Disable

$CSNPM01

Pick Mode = Enable

108 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

CAMERA CONTROL ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Mobile Phone Mode

This mode is useful for scanning bar codes displayed on a mobile phone. Other options
for this feature can be configured using the Datalogic Aladdin application.

$CSNPE00

Mobile Phone Mode = Disable

$CSNPE01

Mobile Phone Mode = Enable

$CSNPE02

Mobile Phone Mode = Enhanced

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 109

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE READING PARAMETERS

Image Capture
For information and a list of options for Image Capture, use the Datalogic Aladdin con-
figuration application, available for free download from the Datalogic Scanning website.

Multiple Labels Ordering by Code Symbology

This feature allows you to specify the order multiple labels are transmitted by symbol-
ogy type. This parameter is applied when the reader is configured in “Retained Trigger
hold multiple" (see page 93). For detailed information on setting this feature, see
page 292 in “References”.

To configure, scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING

MODE bar code above, then the bar code at left fol-
lowed by Hex values from the table on page 292 cor-
responding to the desired code symbologies. End by
Select Symbologies for Multiple Labels Ordering
scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code.
$CSNMS

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort

and not save the entry string. You can then start
again at the beginning.
CANCEL

000000000000 = Random order

Multiple Labels Ordering by Code Length

Specifies the transmission ordering by code length, when Multiple Labels per Frame is
enabled.

$CSNMT00

Multiple Labels Ordering = Disable

$CSNMT01
Multiple Labels Ordering = Transmit Increasing
Length Order

$CSNMT02
Multiple Labels Ordering = Transmit Decreasing
Length Order

110 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

CONFIGURATION | 1D SYMBOLOGIES
SECTION CONTENTS
DISABLE ALL SYMBOLOGIES starting on page 112

• COUPON CONTROL starting on page 112 • INTERLEAVED 2 OF 5 (I 2 OF 5) starting

on page 146
• UPC-A starting on page 113 • INTERLEAVED 2 OF 5, FEBRABAN
(DESK MODELS ONLY) starting on page
150
• UPC-E starting on page 115 • INTERLEAVED 2 OF 5 CIP HR starting on
page 150
• EAN-13 starting on page 118 • MATRIX 2 OF 5 starting on page 151

• EAN-8 starting on page 121 • STANDARD 2 OF 5 starting on page 154

• UPC/EAN GLOBAL SETTINGS starting • COMPRESSED 2 OF 5 starting on page 157

on page 123
• GS1 DATABAR™ OMNIDIRECTIONAL • DATALOGIC 2 OF 5 starting on page 160
starting on page 127
• GS1 DATABAR™ EXPANDED starting on • INDUSTRIAL 2 OF 5 starting on page 163
page 128
• GS1 DATABAR™ LIMITED starting on • IATA starting on page 166
page 131
• CODE 39 starting on page 132 • FOLLETT 2 OF 5 starting on page 167

• TRIOPTIC CODE starting on page 137 • CODABAR starting on page 168

• CODE 39 DANISH PPT starting on page • ABC CODABAR starting on page 174
137
• CODE 39 PZN starting on page 138 • ISBT 128 starting on page 176

• CODE 39 LA POSTE starting on page 138 • CODE 11 starting on page 179

• CODE 32 (ITALIAN PHARMACEUTICAL) • CODE 93 starting on page 182

starting on page 139
• CODE 39 CIP HR (FRENCH PHARMA- • MSI starting on page 186
CEUTICAL) starting on page 140
• CODE 128 starting on page 141 • PLESSEY starting on page 189

• GS1-128 starting on page 145 • BC412 starting on page 192

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 111

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE 1D SYMBOLOGIES

DISABLE ALL SYMBOLOGIES

Scan this label to disable all symbologies.

$AD

Disable All Symbologies

COUPON CONTROL

Coupon Control
This feature is used to control the method of processing coupon labels.
Options are:
• Allow all — allow all coupon bar codes to be decoded
• Enable only UPC/EAN — enables only UPC/EAN coupon decoding
• Enable only GS1 DataBar — enables only GS1 DataBar coupon decoding
To set this feature:

1. Scan the Enter/Exit bar code.

2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused
bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the reader sees only the bar
code you intend to scan.

3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the Enter/Exit bar code.

$CCPCL00

Coupon Control = Allow all

$CCPCL01

Coupon Control = Enable only UPC/EAN

$CCPCL02

Coupon Control = Enable only GS1 DataBar

112 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

UPC-A ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

UPC-A
The following options apply to the UPC-A symbology.

UPC-A Enable/Disable
When disabled, the reader will not read UPC-A bar codes.

$CABEN00

UPC-A = Disable

$CABEN01

UPC-A = Enable

UPC-A Check Character Transmission

Enable this option to transmit the check character along with UPC-A bar code data.

$CABCT00

UPC-A Check Character Transmission = Don’t Send

$CABCT01

UPC-A Check Character Transmission = Send

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 113

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE 1D SYMBOLOGIES

Expand UPC-A to EAN-13

Expands UPC-A data to the EAN-13 data format. Selecting this feature also changes the
symbology ID to match those required for EAN-13.

$CAB3B00

UPC-A to EAN-13 = Don’t Expand

$CAB3B01

UPC-A to EAN-13 = Expand

UPC-A Number System Character Transmission

This feature enables/disables transmission of the UPC-A number system character.

$CABNS00

UPC-A Number System Character = Do not transmit

$CABNS01

UPC-A Number System Character = Transmit

114 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

UPC-E ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

UPC-E
The following options apply to the UPC-E symbology.

UPC-E Enable/Disable
When disabled, the reader will not read UPC-E bar codes.

$CEBEN00

UPC-E = Disable

$CEBEN01

UPC-E = Enable

UPC-E Check Character Transmission

Enable this option to transmit the check character along with UPC-E bar code data.

$CEBCT00

UPC-E Check Character Transmission = Don’t Send

$CEBCT01

UPC-E Check Character Transmission = Send

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 115

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE 1D SYMBOLOGIES

Expand UPC-E to EAN-13

Expands UPC-E data to the EAN-13 data format. Selecting this feature also changes the
symbology ID to match those required for EAN-13.

$CEB3B00

UPC-E to EAN-13 = Don’t Expand

$CEB3B01

UPC-E to EAN-13 = Expand

Expand UPC-E to UPC-A

Expands UPC-E data to the UPC-A data format. Selecting this feature also changes the
symbology ID to match those required for UPC-A.

$CEBAB00

UPC-E to UPC-A = Don’t Expand

$CEBAB01

UPC-E to UPC-A = Expand

116 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

UPC-E ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

UPC-E Number System Character Transmission

This feature enables/disables transmission of the UPC-E number system character.

$CEBNS00

UPC-E Number System Character = Do not transmit

$CEBNS01

UPC-E Number System Character = Transmit

GTIN Formatting
This feature enables/disables the ability to convert UPC-E, UPC-A, EAN-8, and EAN-13
labels into the GTIN 14-character format.

$CGBEN00

GTIN Formatting = Disable

$CGBEN01

GTIN Formatting = Enable

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 117

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE 1D SYMBOLOGIES

EAN-13
The following options apply to the EAN-13 symbology.

EAN-13 Enable/Disable
When disabled, the reader will not read EAN-13 bar codes.

$C3BEN00

EAN-13 = Disable

$C3BEN01

EAN-13 = Enable

EAN-13 Check Character Transmission

Enable this option to transmit the check character along with EAN-13 bar code data.

$C3BCT00

EAN-13 Check Character Transmission = Don’t Send

$C3BCT01

EAN-13 Check Character Transmission = Send

118 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

EAN-13 ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

EAN-13 Flag 1 Character

Enables/disables transmission of an EAN/JAN-13 Flag1 character. The Flag 1 character is
the first character of the label

$C3BF100

EAN-13 Flag 1 Char = Don’t transmit

$C3BF101

EAN-13 Flag 1 Char = Transmit

EAN-13 to ISBN Conversion

This option enables/disables conversion of EAN-13/JAN-13 Bookland labels starting with
978 to ISBN labels.

$C3BIS00

EAN-13 ISBN Conversion = Disable

$C3BIS01

EAN-13 ISBN Conversion = Enable

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 119

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE 1D SYMBOLOGIES

EAN-13 to ISSN Conversion

Enables/disables conversion of EAN/JAN-13 Bookland labels starting with 977 to ISSN
labels.

$C3BIN00

ISSN = Disable

$C3BIN01

ISSN = Enable

120 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

EAN-8 ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

EAN-8
The following options apply to the EAN-8 symbology.

EAN-8 Enable/Disable
When disabled, the reader will not read EAN-8 bar codes.

$C8BEN00

EAN-8 = Disable

$C8BEN01

EAN-8 = Enable

EAN-8 Check Character Transmission

Enable this option to transmit the check character along with EAN-8 bar code data.

$C8BCT00

EAN-8 Check Character Transmission = Don’t Send

$C8BCT01

EAN-8 Check Character Transmission = Send

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 121

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE 1D SYMBOLOGIES

Expand EAN-8 to EAN-13

Enable this option to expand EAN-8/JAN-8 labels to EAN-13/JAN-13.

$C8B3B00

EAN-8 to EAN-13 = Don’t Expand

$C8B3B01

EAN-8 to EAN-13 = Expand

122 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

UPC/EAN GLOBAL SETTINGS ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

UPC/EAN GLOBAL SETTINGS

This section provides configuration settings for UPC-A, UPC-E, EAN 13 and EAN 8 sym-
bologies, and affects all of these unless otherwise marked for each feature description.

UPC/EAN Price Weight Check

This feature enables/disables calculation and verification of price/weight check digits.
Options are
•Disabled
•Enable 4-digit price-weight check-digit calculation
•Enable 5-digit price-weight check-digit calculation
•Enable European 4-digit price-weight check-digit calculation
•Enable European 5-digit price-weight check-digit calculation

$CPWEN00

Price Weight Check = Disable

$CPWEN01

Price Weight Check = 4-digit price-weight check

$CPWEN02

Price Weight Check = 5-digit price-weight check

$CPWEN03

Price Weight Check = European 4-digit price-weight check

$CPWEN04

Price Weight Check = European 5-digit price-weight check

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 123

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE 1D SYMBOLOGIES

UPC/EAN Quiet Zones

This feature specifies the number of quiet zones for UPC/EAN labels. Quiet zones are
blank areas at the ends of a bar code, typically 10 times the width of the narrowest bar
or space in the label. The property applies to all EAN-UPC symbologies globally and to
the ADD-ONs.

$CUNLO02

UPC/EAN Quiet Zones = Two Modules

$CUNLO05

UPC/EAN Quiet Zones = Five Modules

Add-Ons
The following features apply to optional add-ons.

NOTE: Contact Customer Support for advanced programming of optional

and conditional add-ons.

124 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

UPC/EAN GLOBAL SETTINGS ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Optional Add-ons
The reader can be enabled to optionally read the following add-ons (supplementals):
• P2
• P5
NOTE: If a UPC/EAN base label and a an add-on are both decoded, the
reader will transmit the base label and add-on. If a UPC/EAN base label is
decoded without an add-on, the base label will be transmitted without an
add-on.
Conditional add-on settings (if enabled) are considered by the reader
before optional add-on settings.

$CADO200

Optional Add-Ons = Disable P2

$CADO201

Optional Add-Ons = Enable P2

$CADO500

Optional Add-Ons = Disable P5

$CADO501

Optional Add-Ons = Enable P5

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 125

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE 1D SYMBOLOGIES

Optional Add-On Timer

This option sets the time the reader will look for an add-on when an add-on fragment
has been seen and optional add-ons are enabled.

$CADOT01

Optional Add-on Timer = 10ms

$CADOT02

Optional Add-on Timer = 20ms

$CADOT03

Optional Add-on Timer = 30ms

$CADOT05

Optional Add-on Timer = 50ms

$CADOT07

Optional Add-on Timer = 70ms

$CADOT0A

Optional Add-on Timer = 100ms

$CADOT10

Optional Add-on Timer = 160ms

126 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

GS1 DATABAR™ OMNIDIRECTIONAL ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

GS1 DATABAR™ OMNIDIRECTIONAL

The following options apply to the GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional (formerly RSS-14) sym-
bology.

GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional Enable/Disable

When disabled, the reader will not read GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional bar codes.

$C4BEN00

GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional = Disable

$C4BEN01

GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional = Enable

GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional to GS1-128 Emulation

When enabled, GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional bar codes will be translated to the GS1-
128 label data format.

$C4BU800
GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional to GS1-128 Emulation
= Disable

$C4BU801
GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional to GS1-128 Emulation
= Enable

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 127

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE 1D SYMBOLOGIES

GS1 DATABAR™ EXPANDED

The following options apply to the GS1 DataBar Expanded (formerly RSS Expanded) sym-
bology.

GS1 DataBar Expanded Enable/Disable

When disabled, the reader will not read GS1 DataBar Expanded bar codes.

$CXBEN00

GS1 DataBar Expanded = Disable

$CXBEN01

GS1 DataBar Expanded = Enable

GS1 DataBar Expanded to GS1-128 Emulation

When enabled, GS1 DataBar Expanded bar codes will be translated to the GS1-128 label
data format.

$CXBU800
GS1 DataBar Expanded to GS1-128 Emulation
= Disable

$CXBU801
GS1 DataBar Expanded to GS1-128 Emulation
= Enable

128 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

GS1 DATABAR™ EXPANDED ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

GS1 DataBar Expanded Length Control

This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for the
GS1 DataBar Expanded symbology.
Variable Length: For variable-length decoding, a minimum length may be set.
Fixed Length: For fixed-length decoding, two different lengths may be set.

$CXBLC00
GS1 DataBar Expanded Length Control
= Variable Length

$CXBLC01

GS1 DataBar Expanded Length Control = Fixed Length

GS1 DataBar Expanded Set Length 1

This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for "GS1 DataBar Expanded Length
Control" on page 129. Length 1 is the minimum label length if in Variable Length Mode,
or the first fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode. Length includes the bar code’s data
characters only.
The length can be set from 1 to 74 characters. See "Set Length 1" on page 301 for more
detailed programming instructions.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO-

GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar
code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanu-
meric characters in Appendix D, Keypad represent-
Select GS1 DataBar Expanded Set Length 1 Setting ing your desired character(s). End by scanning the
$CXBL1 ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort

and not save the entry string. You can then start
again at the beginning.
CANCEL

Length 1 = 01 (one character)

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 129

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE 1D SYMBOLOGIES

GS1 DataBar Expanded Set Length 2

This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for "GS1 DataBar Expanded Length
Control" on page 129. Length 2 is the maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode,
or the second fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode. Length includes the bar code’s data
characters only.
The length can be set from 1 to 74 characters. A setting of 00 specifies to ignore this
length (only one fixed length). See "Set Length 2" on page 302 for more detailed pro-
gramming instructions.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO-

GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar
code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanu-
meric characters in Appendix D, Keypad represent-
Select GS1 DataBar Expanded Set Length 2 Setting ing your desired character(s). End by scanning the
$CXBL2 ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort

and not save the entry string. You can then start
again at the beginning.
CANCEL

Length 2 = 74 (74 characters)

130 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

GS1 DATABAR™ LIMITED ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

GS1 DATABAR™ LIMITED

The following options apply to the GS1 DataBar Limited (formerly RSS Limited) symbol-
ogy.

GS1 DataBar Limited Enable/Disable

When disabled, the reader will not read GS1 DataBar Limited bar codes.

$CLBEN00

GS1 DataBar Limited = Disable

$CLBEN01

GS1 DataBar Limited = Enable

GS1 DataBar Limited to GS1-128 Emulation

When enabled, GS1 DataBar Limited bar codes will be translated to the GS1-128 label
data format.

$CLBU800
GS1 DataBar Limited to GS1-128 Emulation
= Disable

$CLBU801
GS1 DataBar Limited to GS1-128 Emulation
= Enable

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 131

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE 1D SYMBOLOGIES

CODE 39
The following options apply to the Code 39 symbology.

Code 39 Enable/Disable
When disabled, the reader will not read Code 39 bar codes.

$CC3EN00

Code 39 = Disable

$CC3EN01

Code 39 = Enable

Code 39 Check Character Calculation

Enable this option to enable/disable calculation and verification of an optional Code 39
check character. When disabled, any check character in the label is treated as a data
character.

$CC3CC00

Code 39 Check Character Calculation = Don’t Calculate

$CC3CC01

Code 39 Check Character Calculation = Calculate Std Check

$CC3CC02
Code 39 Check Character Calculation = Calculate Mod 7
Check

$CC3CC04
Code 39 Check Character Calculation = Enable Italian Post
Check

$CC3CC08
Code 39 Check Character Calculation = Enable Daimler
Chrysler Check

132 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

CODE 39 ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Code 39 Check Character Transmission

Enable this option to transmit the check character along with Code 39 bar code data.

$CC3CT00

Code 39 Check Character Transmission = Don’t Send

$CC3CT01

Code 39 Check Character Transmission = Send

Code 39 Start/Stop Character Transmission

Enable this option to enable/disable transmission of Code 39 start and stop characters.

$CC3SS00
Code 39 Start/Stop Character Transmission
= Don’t Transmit

$CC3SS01
Code 39 Start/Stop Character Transmission
= Transmit

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 133

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE 1D SYMBOLOGIES

Code 39 Full ASCII

In Code 39 decoding, this enables/disables the translation of Code 39 characters to
Code 39 full-ASCII characters.

$CC3FA00

Code 39 Full ASCII = Disable

$CC3FA01

Code 39 Full ASCII = Enable

Code 39 Quiet Zones

This feature specifies the number of quiet zones for Code 39 labels. Quiet zones are
blank areas at the ends of a bar code and are typically 10 times the width of the narrow-
est bar or space in the label.

$CC3LO01

Code 39 Quiet Zones = Quiet Zone on one side

$CC3LO02

Code 39 Quiet Zones = Quiet Zones on two sides

$CC3LO03

Code 39 Quiet Zones = Auto

$CC3LO04

Code 39 Quiet Zones = Virtual Quiet Zones on two sides

$CC3LO00
Code 39 Quiet Zones =
Small Quiet Zones on two sides

134 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

CODE 39 ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Code 39 Length Control

This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for the
Code 39 symbology.
Variable Length: For variable-length decoding, a minimum length may be set.
Fixed Length: For fixed-length decoding, two different lengths may be set.

$CC3LC00
Code 39 Length Control
= Variable Length

$CC3LC01

Code 39 Length Control = Fixed Length

Code 39 Set Length 1

This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for "Code 39 Length Control" on page
135. Length 1 is the minimum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first fixed
length if in Fixed Length Mode. Length includes the bar code’s check, data, and full-ASCII
shift characters. The length does not include start/stop characters.
The length can be set from 0 to 50 characters. See "Set Length 1" on page 301 for more
detailed programming instructions.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO-

GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar
code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanu-
meric characters in Appendix D, Keypad represent-
Select Code 39 Set Length 1 Setting ing your desired character(s). End by scanning the
$CC3L1 ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort

and not save the entry string. You can then start
again at the beginning.
CANCEL

Length 1 = 02 (2 characters)

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 135

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE 1D SYMBOLOGIES

Code 39 Set Length 2

This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for "Code 39 Length Control" on page
135. Length 2 is the maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the second
fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode. Length includes the bar code’s check, data, and
full-ASCII shift characters. The length does not include start/stop characters.
The length can be set from 1 to 50 characters. A setting of 00 specifies to ignore this
length (only one fixed length). See "Set Length 2" on page 302 for more detailed pro-
gramming instructions.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO-

GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar
code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanu-
meric characters in Appendix D, Keypad represent-
Select Code 39 Set Length 2 Setting ing your desired character(s). End by scanning the
$CC3L2 ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort

and not save the entry string. You can then start
again at the beginning.
CANCEL

Length 2 = 50 (50 characters)

136 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

TRIOPTIC CODE ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

TRIOPTIC CODE
The following options apply to the trioptic symbology.

Trioptic Code Enable/Disable

When disabled, the reader will not read Trioptic Code bar codes.

$CCTEN00

Trioptic Code = Disable

$CCTEN01

Trioptic Code = Enable

CODE 39 DANISH PPT

The following options apply to the Code 39 Danish PPT symbology.

Code 39 Danish PPT Enable/Disable

When disabled, the reader will not read Code 39 Danish PPT bar codes.

$CDPEN00

Code 39 Danish PPT = Disable

$CDPEN01

Code 39 Danish PPT = Enable

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 137

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE 1D SYMBOLOGIES

CODE 39 PZN
The following options apply to the Code 39 PZN symbology.

Code 39 PZN Enable/Disable

When disabled, the reader will not read Code 39 PZN bar codes.

$CPZEN00

Code 39 PZN = Disable

$CPZEN01

Code 39 PZN = Enable

CODE 39 LA POSTE
The following options apply to the Code 39 La Poste symbology.

Code 39 La Poste Enable/Disable

When disabled, the reader will not read Code 39 La Poste bar codes.

$CLPEN00

Code 39 La Poste = Disable

$CLPEN01

Code 39 La Poste = Enable

138 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

CODE 32 (ITALIAN PHARMACEUTICAL) ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

CODE 32 (ITALIAN PHARMACEUTICAL)

The following options apply to the Code 32 symbology.

Code 32 Enable/Disable
When disabled, the reader will not read Code 32 bar codes.

$CP3EN00

Code 32 = Disable

$CP3EN01

Code 32 = Enable

Code 32 Feature Setting Exceptions

NOTE: The following features are set for Code 32 by using these Code 39
settings:
"Code 39 Quiet Zones" on page 134
"Code 39 Length Control" on page 135

Code 32 Check Character Transmission

Enable this option to transmit the check character along with Code 32 bar code data.

$CP3CT00
Code 32 Check Character Transmission = Don’t
Send

$CP3CT01

Code 32 Check Character Transmission = Send

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 139

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE 1D SYMBOLOGIES

Code 32 Start/Stop Character Transmission

Enable this option to enable/disable transmission of Code 32 start and stop characters.

$CP3SS00
Code 32 Start/Stop Character Transmission
= Don’t Transmit

$CP3SS01
Code 32 Start/Stop Character Transmission
= Transmit

CODE 39 CIP HR (FRENCH PHARMACEUTICAL)

The following options apply to the Code 39 CIP HR symbology.

Code 39 CIP HR Enable/Disable

Enables/Disables ability of the reader to decode Code 39 CIP HR labels.

$CCCEN00

Code 39 CIP HR = Disable

$CCCEN01

Code 39 CIP HR = Enable

140 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

CODE 128 ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

CODE 128
The following options apply to the Code 128 symbology.

Code 128 Enable/Disable

Enables/Disables ability of the reader to decode Code 128 labels.

$CC8EN00

Code 128 = Disable

$CC8EN01

Code 128 = Enable

Expand Code 128 to Code 39

This feature enables/disables expansion of Code 128 labels to Code 39 labels. When
enabled, the label identifier for a Code 128 label shall be set to Code 39 and all Code 39
formatting control shall be applied to the label.

$CC8C300

Code 128 to Code 39 = Don’t Expand

$CC8C301

Code 128 to Code 39 = Expand

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 141

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE 1D SYMBOLOGIES

Code 128 Check Character Transmission

Enable this option to transmit the check character along with Code 128 bar code data.

$CC8CT00
Code 128 Check Character Transmission =
Don’t Send

$CC8CT01

Code 128 Check Character Transmission = Send

Code 128 Function Character Transmission

Enables/disables transmission of Code128 function characters 1, 2, 3, and 4.

$CC8TF00
Code 128 Function Character Transmission =
Don’t Send

$CC8TF01

Code 128 Function Character Transmission = Send

142 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

CODE 128 ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Code 128 Quiet Zones

This feature specifies the number of quiet zones for Code 128 labels. Quiet zones are
blank areas at the ends of a bar code and are typically 10 times the width of the narrow-
est bar or space in the label.

$CC8LO00

Code 128 Quiet Zones = No Quiet Zones

$CC8LO01

Code 128 Quiet Zones = Quiet Zone on one side

$CC8LO02

Code 128 Quiet Zones = Quiet Zones on two sides

$CC8LO03

Code 128 Quiet Zones = Auto

$CC8LO04

Code 128 Quiet Zones = Virtual Quiet Zones on two sides

Code 128 Length Control

This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for the
Code 128 symbology.
Variable Length: For variable-length decoding, a minimum length may be set.
Fixed Length: For fixed-length decoding, two different lengths may be set.

$CC8LC00

Code 128 Length Control = Variable Length

$CC8LC01

Code 128 Length Control = Fixed Length

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 143

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE 1D SYMBOLOGIES

Code 128 Set Length 1

This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for "Code 128 Length Control" on page
143. Length 1 is the minimum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first fixed
length if in Fixed Length Mode. Length includes the bar code’s data characters only.
The length can be set from 1 to 80 characters. See "Set Length 1" on page 301 for more
detailed programming instructions.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO-

GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar
code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanu-
meric characters in Appendix D, Keypad represent-
Select Code 128 Set Length 1 Setting ing your desired character(s). End by scanning the
$CC8L1 ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort

and not save the entry string. You can then start
again at the beginning.
CANCEL

Length 1 = 01 (one character)

Code 128 Set Length 2

This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for "Code 128 Length Control" on page
143. Length 2 is the maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the second
fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode. Length includes the bar code’s data characters
only.
The length can be set from 1 to 80 characters. A setting of 00 specifies to ignore this
length (only one fixed length). See "Set Length 2" on page 302 for more detailed pro-
gramming instructions.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO-

GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar
code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanu-
meric characters in Appendix D, Keypad represent-
Select Code 128 Set Length 2 Setting ing your desired character(s). End by scanning the
$CC8L2 ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort

and not save the entry string. You can then start
again at the beginning.
CANCEL

Length 2 = 80 (80 characters)

144 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

GS1-128 ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

GS1-128
The following options apply to the GS1-128 symbology. (Also known as USS-128, GTIN-
128, UCC-128.)

GS1-128 Enable
This option enables/disables the ability of the reader to translate GS1-128 labels to the
GS1-128 data format. Options are:
• Transmit GS1-128 labels in Code 128 data format.
• Transmit GS1-128 labels in GS1-128 data format.
• Do not transmit GS1-128 labels.

$CU8EN00

GS1-128 = Transmit in Code 128 data format

$CU8EN01

GS1-128 = Transmit in GS1-128 data format

$CU8EN02

GS1-128 = Do not transmit GS1-128 labels

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 145

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE 1D SYMBOLOGIES

INTERLEAVED 2 OF 5 (I 2 OF 5)
The following options apply to the I 2 of 5 symbology.
CAUTION: When reading this symbology, the settings for I 2 of 5 Length
Control AND I 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation MUST be enabled to
increase decoding safety.

I 2 of 5 Enable/Disable
When disabled, the reader will not read I 2 of 5 bar codes.

$CI2EN00

I 2 of 5 = Disable

$CI2EN01

I 2 of 5 = Enable

I 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation

This option enables/disables calculation and verification of an optional I 2 of 5 check
character.

$CI2CC00

I 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation = Disable

$CI2CC01
I 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation
= Calculate Std Check (Modulo 10 no AR)

$CI2CC02
I 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation
= Calculate German Parcel Check

146 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

INTERLEAVED 2 OF 5 (I 2 OF 5) ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

I 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation (continued)

$CI2CC04
I 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation
= Calculate DHL Check

$CI2CC08
I 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation
= Calculate Daimler Chrysler Check

$CI2CC10
I 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation
= Calculate Bosch Check

$CI2CC20
I 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation
= Calculate Italian Post Check

I 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission

Enable this option to transmit the check character along with I 2 of 5 bar code data.

NOTE: This feature is valid only when I 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation

is enabled.

$CI2CT00

I 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission = Don’t Send

$CI2CT01

I 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission = Send

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 147

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE 1D SYMBOLOGIES

I 2 of 5 Length Control
This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for the I 2
of 5 symbology.
Variable Length: For variable-length decoding, a minimum length may be set.
Fixed Length: For fixed-length decoding, two different lengths may be set.

$CI2LC00

I 2 of 5 Length Control = Variable Length

$CI2LC01

I 2 of 5 Length Control = Fixed Length

I 2 of 5 Set Length 1
This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for "I 2 of 5 Length Control" on page
148. Length 1 is the minimum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first fixed
length if in Fixed Length Mode. The length includes the bar code’s check and data char-
acters. The length can be set from 2 to 50 characters in increments of two. See "Set
Length 1" on page 301 for more detailed programming instructions.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO-

GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar
code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanu-
meric characters in Appendix D, Keypad represent-
Select I 2 of 5 Set Length 1 Setting ing your desired character(s). End by scanning the
$CI2L1 ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort

and not save the entry string. You can then start
again at the beginning.
CANCEL

Length 1 = 06 (6 characters)

148 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

INTERLEAVED 2 OF 5 (I 2 OF 5) ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

I 2 of 5 Set Length 2
This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for "I 2 of 5 Length Control" on page
148. Length 2 is the maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the second
fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode. The length includes the bar code’s check and data
characters. The length can be set from 2 to 50 characters in increments of two. A setting
of 00 specifies to ignore this length (only one fixed length). See "Set Length 2" on page
302 for more detailed programming instructions.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO-

GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar
code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanu-
meric characters in Appendix D, Keypad represent-
Select I 2 of 5 Set Length 2 Setting ing your desired character(s). End by scanning the
$CI2L2 ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort

and not save the entry string. You can then start
again at the beginning.
CANCEL

Length 2 = 50 (50 characters)

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 149

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE 1D SYMBOLOGIES

INTERLEAVED 2 OF 5, FEBRABAN
(DESK MODELS ONLY)

Interleaved 2 of 5, Febraban format Enable / Disable

NOTE: Interleaved 2 of 5 shall be enabled before enabling Febraban variant.

Enables/Disables ability of reader to decode Interleaved 2 of 5, Febraban format.

$CI2FE00

2 of 5, Febraban format = Disable

$CI2FE01

2 of 5, Febraban format = Enable

INTERLEAVED 2 OF 5 CIP HR
The following options apply to the Interleaved 2 of 5 CIP HR symbology.

Interleaved 2 of 5 CIP HR Enable/Disable

Enables/Disables ability of the reader to decode Interleaved 2 of 5 CIP HR labels.

$CCHEN00

Interleaved 2 of 5 CIP HR = Disable

$CCHEN01

Interleaved 2 of 5 CIP HR = Enable

150 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

MATRIX 2 OF 5 ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

MATRIX 2 OF 5
The following options apply to the Matrix 2 of 5 symbology.

Matrix 2 of 5 Enable/Disable
When disabled, the reader will not read Matrix 2 of 5 bar codes.

$CM2EN00

Matrix 2 of 5 = Disable

$CM2EN01

Matrix 2 of 5 = Enable

Matrix 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation

This option enables/disables calculation and verification of an optional Matrix 2 of 5
check character.

$CM2CC00
Matrix 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation
= Disable

$CM2CC01

Matrix 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation = Enable

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 151

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE 1D SYMBOLOGIES

Matrix 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission

This feature enables/disables transmission of an optional Matrix 2 of 5 check character.

$CM2CT00
Matrix 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission
= Don’t Send

$CM2CT01
Matrix 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission
= Send

Matrix 2 of 5 Length Control

This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for the
Matrix 2 of 5 symbology.
Variable Length: For variable-length decoding, a minimum length may be set.
Fixed Length: For fixed-length decoding, two different lengths may be set.

$CM2LC00

Matrix 2 of 5 Length Control = Variable Length

$CM2LC01

Matrix 2 of 5 Length Control = Fixed Length

152 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

MATRIX 2 OF 5 ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Matrix 2 of 5 Set Length 1

This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for "Standard 2 of 5 Length Control" on
page 155. Length 1 is the minimum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first
fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode. The length includes the bar code’s check and data
characters.
The length can be set from 1 to 50 characters. See "Set Length 1" on page 301 for more
detailed programming instructions.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO-

GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar
code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanu-
meric characters in Appendix D, Keypad represent-
Select Matrix 2 of 5 Length 1 Setting ing your desired character(s). End by scanning the
$CM2L1 ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort

and not save the entry string. You can then start
again at the beginning.
CANCEL

Length 1 = 01 (1 character)

Matrix 2 of 5 Set Length 2

This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for "Standard 2 of 5 Length Control" on
page 155. Length 2 is the maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the sec-
ond fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode. The length includes the bar code’s check and
data characters.
The length can be set from 1 to 50 characters. A setting of 00 specifies to ignore this
length (only one fixed length). See "Set Length 2" on page 302 for more detailed pro-
gramming instructions.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO-

GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar
code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanu-
meric characters in Appendix D, Keypad represent-
Select Matrix 2 of 5 Set Length 2 Setting ing your desired character(s). End by scanning the
$CM2L2 ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort

and not save the entry string. You can then start
again at the beginning.
CANCEL

Length 2 = 50 (50 characters)

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 153

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE 1D SYMBOLOGIES

STANDARD 2 OF 5
The following options apply to the Standard 2 of 5 symbology.

Standard 2 of 5 Enable/Disable
When disabled, the reader will not read Standard 2 of 5 bar codes.

$CS2EN00

Standard 2 of 5 = Disable

$CS2EN01

Standard 2 of 5 = Enable

Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation

This option enables/disables calculation and verification of an optional Standard 2 of 5
check character.

$CS2CC00
Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation
= Disable

$CS2CC01

Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation = Enable

154 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

STANDARD 2 OF 5 ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission

This feature enables/disables transmission of an optional Standard 2 of 5 check charac-
ter.

$CS2CT00
Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission
= Don’t Send

$CS2CT01
Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission
= Send

Standard 2 of 5 Length Control

This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for the
Standard 2 of 5 symbology.
Variable Length: For variable-length decoding, a minimum length may be set.
Fixed Length: For fixed-length decoding, two different lengths may be set.

$CS2LC00

Standard 2 of 5 Length Control = Variable Length

$CS2LC01

Standard 2 of 5 Length Control = Fixed Length

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 155

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE 1D SYMBOLOGIES

Standard 2 of 5 Set Length 1

This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for "Standard 2 of 5 Length Control" on
page 155. Length 1 is the minimum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first
fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode. The length includes the bar code’s check and data
characters.
The length can be set from 1 to 50 characters. See "Set Length 1" on page 301 for more
detailed programming instructions.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO-

GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar
code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanu-
meric characters in Appendix D, Keypad represent-
Select Standard 2 of 5 Length 1 Setting ing your desired character(s). End by scanning the
$CS2L1 ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort

and not save the entry string. You can then start
again at the beginning.
CANCEL

Length 1 = 08 (8 characters)

Standard 2 of 5 Set Length 2

This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for "Standard 2 of 5 Length Control" on
page 155. Length 2 is the maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the sec-
ond fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode. The length includes the bar code’s check and
data characters.
The length can be set from 1 to 50 characters. A setting of 00 specifies to ignore this
length (only one fixed length). See "Set Length 2" on page 302 for more detailed pro-
gramming instructions.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO-

GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar
code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanu-
meric characters in Appendix D, Keypad represent-
Select Standard 2 of 5 Set Length 2 Setting ing your desired character(s). End by scanning the
$CS2L2 ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort

and not save the entry string. You can then start
again at the beginning.
CANCEL

Length 2 = 50 (50 characters)

156 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

COMPRESSED 2 OF 5 ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

COMPRESSED 2 OF 5
The following options apply to the Compressed 2 of 5 symbology.

Compressed 2 of 5 Enable/Disable
When disabled, the reader will not read Compressed 2 of 5 bar codes.

$CC2EN00

Compressed 2 of 5 = Disable

$CC2EN01

Compressed 2 of 5 = Enable

Compressed 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation

This option enables/disables calculation and verification of an optional Compressed 2 of
5 check character.

$CC2CC00
Compressed 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation
= Disable

$CC2CC01

Compressed 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation = Enable

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 157

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE 1D SYMBOLOGIES

Compressed 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission

This feature enables/disables transmission of an optional Compressed 2 of 5 check char-
acter.

$CC2CT00
Compressed 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission
= Don’t Send

$CC2CT01
Compressed 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission
= Send

Compressed 2 of 5 Length Control

This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for the
Compressed 2 of 5 symbology.
Variable Length: For variable-length decoding, a minimum length may be set.
Fixed Length: For fixed-length decoding, two different lengths may be set.

$CC2LC00
Compressed 2 of 5 Length Control = Variable
Length

$CC2LC01

Compressed 2 of 5 Length Control = Fixed Length

158 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

COMPRESSED 2 OF 5 ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Compressed 2 of 5 Set Length 1

This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for "Compressed 2 of 5 Length Control"
on page 158. Length 1 is the minimum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the
first fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode. The length includes the bar code’s check and
data characters.
The length can be set from 1 to 50 characters. See "Set Length 1" on page 301 for more
detailed programming instructions.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO-

GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar
code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanu-
meric characters in Appendix D, Keypad represent-
Select Compressed 2 of 5 Length 1 Setting ing your desired character(s). End by scanning the
$CC2L1 ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort

and not save the entry string. You can then start
again at the beginning.
CANCEL

Length 1 = 01 (one character)

Compressed 2 of 5 Set Length 2

This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for "Compressed 2 of 5 Length Control"
on page 158. Length 2 is the maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the
second fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode. The length includes the bar code’s check
and data characters.
The length can be set from 1 to 50 characters. A setting of 00 specifies to ignore this
length (only one fixed length). See "Set Length 2" on page 302 for more detailed pro-
gramming instructions.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO-

GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar
code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanu-
meric characters in Appendix D, Keypad represent-
Select Compressed 2 of 5 Set Length 2 Setting ing your desired character(s). End by scanning the
$CC2L2 ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort

and not save the entry string. You can then start
again at the beginning.
CANCEL

Length 2 = 50 (50 characters)

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 159

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE 1D SYMBOLOGIES

DATALOGIC 2 OF 5
The following options apply to the Datalogic 2 of 5 symbology.

Datalogic 2 of 5 Enable/Disable
When disabled, the reader will not read Datalogic 2 of 5 bar codes.

$CD2EN00

Datalogic 2 of 5 = Disable

$CD2EN01

Datalogic 2 of 5 = Enable

Datalogic 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation

This option enables/disables calculation and verification of an optional Datalogic 2 of 5
check character.

$CD2CC00
Datalogic 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation
= Disable

$CD2CC01

Datalogic 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation = Enable

160 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

DATALOGIC 2 OF 5 ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Datalogic 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission

Enable this option to transmit the check character along with Datalogic 2 of 5 bar code
data.

$CD2CT00
Datalogic 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission
= Don’t Send

$CD2CT01
Datalogic 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission
= Send

Datalogic 2 of 5 Length Control

This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for the
Datalogic 2 of 5 symbology.
Variable Length: For variable-length decoding, a minimum length may be set.
Fixed Length: For fixed-length decoding, two different lengths may be set.

$CD2LC00

Datalogic 2 of 5 Length Control = Variable Length

$CD2LC01

Datalogic 2 of 5 Length Control = Fixed Length

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 161

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE 1D SYMBOLOGIES

Datalogic 2 of 5 Set Length 1

This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for "Datalogic 2 of 5 Length Control" on
page 161. Length 1 is the minimum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first
fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode. The length includes the bar code’s check and data
characters. The length can be set from 2 to 50 characters in increments of two. See "Set
Length 1" on page 301 for more detailed programming instructions.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO-

GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar
code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanu-
meric characters in Appendix D, Keypad represent-
Select Datalogic 2 of 5 Length 1 Setting ing your desired character(s). End by scanning the
$CD2L1 ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort

and not save the entry string. You can then start
again at the beginning.
CANCEL

Length 1 = 06 (6 characters)

Datalogic 2 of 5 Set Length 2

This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for "Datalogic 2 of 5 Length Control" on
page 161. Length 2 is the maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the sec-
ond fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode. The length includes the bar code’s check and
data characters. The length can be set from 2 to 50 characters. A setting of 00 specifies
to ignore this length (only one fixed length). See "Set Length 2" on page 302 for more
detailed programming instructions.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO-

GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar
code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanu-
meric characters in Appendix D, Keypad represent-
Select Datalogic 2 of 5 Set Length 2 Setting ing your desired character(s). End by scanning the
$CD2L2 ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort

and not save the entry string. You can then start
again at the beginning.
CANCEL

Length 2 = 50 (50 characters)

162 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

INDUSTRIAL 2 OF 5 ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

INDUSTRIAL 2 OF 5
The following options apply to the Industrial 2 of 5 symbology.

Industrial 2 of 5 Enable/Disable
When disabled, the reader will not read Industrial 2 of 5 bar codes.

$CU2EN00

Industrial 2 of 5 = Disable

$CU2EN01

Industrial 2 of 5 = Enable

Industrial 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation

Enables/Disables calculation and verification of an optional Industrial 2 of 5 check char-
acter.

$CU2CC00
Industrial 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation
= Disable

$CU2CC01

Industrial 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation = Enable

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 163

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE 1D SYMBOLOGIES

Industrial 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission

Enables/disables transmission of an Industrial 2 of 5 check character.

$CU2CT00
Industrial 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission
= Don’t Send

$CU2CT01
Industrial 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission
= Send

Industrial 2 of 5 Length Control

This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for the
Industrial 2 of 5 symbology.
Variable Length: For variable-length decoding, a minimum length may be set.
Fixed Length: For fixed-length decoding, two different lengths may be set.

$CU2LC00

Industrial 2 of 5 Length Control = Variable Length

$CU2LC01

Industrial 2 of 5 Length Control = Fixed Length

164 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

INDUSTRIAL 2 OF 5 ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Industrial 2 of 5 Set Length 1

This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for "Industrial 2 of 5 Length Control" on
page 164. Length 1 is the minimum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first
fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode. The length includes the bar code’s check and data
characters.
The length can be set from 1 to 50 characters. See "Set Length 1" on page 301 for more
detailed programming instructions.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO-

GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar
code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanu-
meric characters in Appendix D, Keypad represent-
Select Industrial 2 of 5 Length 1 Setting ing your desired character(s). End by scanning the
$CU2L1 ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort

and not save the entry string. You can then start
again at the beginning.
CANCEL

Length 1 = 06 (6 characters)

Industrial 2 of 5 Set Length 2

This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for "Industrial 2 of 5 Length Control" on
page 164. Length 2 is the maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the sec-
ond fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode. The length includes the bar code’s check and
data characters.
The length can be set from 1 to 50 characters. A setting of 00 specifies to ignore this
length (only one fixed length). See "Set Length 2" on page 302 for more detailed pro-
gramming instructions.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO-

GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar
code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanu-
meric characters in Appendix D, Keypad represent-
Select Industrial 2 of 5 Set Length 2 Setting ing your desired character(s). End by scanning the
$CU2L2 ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort

and not save the entry string. You can then start
again at the beginning.
CANCEL

Length 2 = 50 (50 characters)

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 165

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE 1D SYMBOLOGIES

IATA
The following options apply to the IATA symbology.

IATA Enable/Disable
Enables/Disables the ability of the reader to decode IATA labels.

$CIAEN00

IATA = Disable

$CIAEN01

IATA = Enable

IATA Check Character Transmission

Enables/Disables calculation and verification of an optional IATA check character.

$CIACT00
IATA Check Character Transmission
= Don’t Send

$CIACT01
IATA Check Character Transmission
= Send

166 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

FOLLETT 2 OF 5 ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

FOLLETT 2 OF 5
The following options apply to the Follett 2 of 5 symbology.

Follett 2 of 5 Enable/Disable
Enables/Disables ability of reader to decode Follett 2 of 5 labels.

$CF2EN00

Follett 2 of 5 = Disable

$CF2EN01

Follett 2 of 5 = Enable

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 167

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE 1D SYMBOLOGIES

CODABAR
The following options apply to the Codabar symbology.

Codabar Enable/Disable
When disabled, the reader will not read Codabar bar codes.

$CCBEN00

Codabar = Disable

$CCBEN01

Codabar = Enable

Codabar Check Character Calculation

This option enables/disables calculation and verification of an optional Codabar check
character. When disabled, any check characters in the label are treated as data charac-
ters.

$CCBCC00

Codabar Check Character Calculation = Disable

$CCBCC01
Codabar Check Character Calculation
= Calculate AIM Std Check

$CCBCC02
Codabar Check Character Calculation
= Calculate Modulo 10 Check

$CCBCC03
Codabar Check Character Calculation
= Calculate NW-7 Check

168 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

CODABAR ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Codabar Check Character Transmission

Enable this option to transmit the check character along with Codabar bar code data.

NOTE: This feature is valid only when Codabar Check Character Calculation
is enabled.

$CCBCT00
Codabar Check Character Transmission
= Don’t Send

$CCBCT01
Codabar Check Character Transmission
= Send

Codabar Start/Stop Character Transmission

This option enables/disables transmission of Codabar start and stop characters.

$CCBSS00
Codabar Start/Stop Character Transmission
= Don’t Transmit

$CCBSS01
Codabar Start/Stop Character Transmission
= Transmit

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 169

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE 1D SYMBOLOGIES

Codabar Start/Stop Character Set

This option specifies the format of transmitted Codabar start/stop characters.

$CCBSC00

Codabar Check Character Set = ABCD/TN*E

$CCBSC01

Codabar Check Character Set = ABCD/ABCD

$CCBSC02

Codabar Check Character Set = abcd/tn*e

$CCBSC03

Codabar Check Character Set = abcd/abcd

Codabar Start/Stop Character Match

When enabled, this option requires that start and stop characters match

$CCBSM00
Codabar Start/Stop Character Match
= Don’t Require Match

$CCBSM01

Codabar Start/Stop Character Match = Require Match

170 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

CODABAR ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Codabar Quiet Zones

This feature specifies the number of quiet zones for Codabar labels. Quiet zones are
blank areas at the ends of a bar code and are typically 10 times the width of the narrow-
est bar or space in the label.

$CCBLO01

Codabar Quiet Zones = Quiet Zone on one side

$CCBLO02

Codabar Quiet Zones = Quiet Zones on two sides

$CCBLO03

Codabar Quiet Zones = Auto

$CCBLO04

Codabar Quiet Zones = Virtual Quiet Zones on two sides

$CCBLO05

Codabar Quiet Zones = Small Quiet Zones on two sides

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 171

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE 1D SYMBOLOGIES

Codabar Length Control

This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for the
Codabar symbology.
Variable Length: For variable-length decoding, a minimum length may be set.
Fixed Length: For fixed-length decoding, two different lengths may be set.

$CCBLC00

Codabar Length Control = Variable Length

$CCBLC01

Codabar Length Control = Fixed Length

Codabar Set Length 1

This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for "Codabar Length Control" on page
172. Length 1 is the minimum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first fixed
length if in Fixed Length Mode. Length includes the bar code’s start, stop, check and
data characters. The length must include at least one data character.
The length can be set from 3 to 50 characters. See "Set Length 1" on page 301 for more
detailed programming instructions.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO-

GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar
code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanu-
meric characters in Appendix D, Keypad represent-
Select Codabar Length 1 Setting ing your desired character(s). End by scanning the
$CCBL1 ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort

and not save the entry string. You can then start
again at the beginning.
CANCEL

Length 1 = 03 (3 characters)

172 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

CODABAR ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Codabar Set Length 2

This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for "Codabar Length Control" on page
172. Length 2 is the maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the second
fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode. The length includes the bar code’s start, stop,
check and data characters. The length must include at least one data character.
The length can be set from 3 to 50 characters. A setting of 00 specifies to ignore this
length (only one fixed length). See "Set Length 2" on page 302 for more detailed pro-
gramming instructions.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO-

GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar
code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanu-
meric characters in Appendix D, Keypad represent-
Select Codabar Length 2 Setting ing your desired character(s). End by scanning the
$CCBL2 ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort

and not save the entry string. You can then start
again at the beginning.
CANCEL

Length 2 = 50 (50 characters)

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 173

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE 1D SYMBOLOGIES

ABC CODABAR
The following options apply to the ABC Codabar symbology.

ABC Codabar Enable/Disable

Enables/Disables ability of reader to decode ABC Codabar labels.

$CCBAB00

ABC Codabar = Disable

$CCBAB01

ABC Codabar = Enable

ABC Codabar Concatenation Mode

Specifies the concatenation mode between Static and Dynamic.

$CCBCM00

ABC Codabar Contatenation Mode = Static

$CCBCM01

ABC Codabar Concatenation Mode = Dynamic

174 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

ABC CODABAR ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

ABC Codabar Dynamic Concatenation Timeout

This parameter specifies the timeout in 10-millisecond ticks used by the ABC Codabar
Dynamic Concatenation Mode. The timeout can be set within a range of 05 to 255 in
10ms increments. A setting of zero specifies no delay.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO-

GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar
code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanu-
meric characters in Appendix D, Keypad represent-
Select ABC Codabar Dynamic Concatenation
ing your desired character(s). End by scanning the
Timeout Setting
ENTER/EXIT bar code again.
$CCBDT

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort

and not save the entry string. You can then start
again at the beginning.
CANCEL

Timeout = 20 (200 msec)

ABC Codabar Force Concatenation

When ABC Codabar Concatenation is enabled and Force Concatenation is disabled, both
Codabar stand alone labels and ABC Codabar concatenated labels are transmitted.
When ABC Codabar Concatenation is enabled and Force Concatenation is enabled only
ABC Codabar concatenated labels are transmitted while Codabar stand alone labels are
not transmitted.
Force Concatenation has no effect if the ABC Codabar Concatenation is disabled. The
Force Concatenation mode has effect both in Static and Dynamic Concatenation Modes.

$CCBFC00

ABC Codabar Force Contatenation = Disable

$CCBFC01

ABC Codabar Force Concatenation = Enable

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 175

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE 1D SYMBOLOGIES

ISBT 128
The following options apply to the ISBT 128 symbology.

ISBT 128 Concatenation

Enables/disables ISBT 128 concatenation of 2 labels.

$CI8CE00

ISBT 128 Concatenation = Disable

$CI8CE01

ISBT 128 Concatenation = Enable

ISBT 128 Concatenation Mode

Specifies the concatenation mode between Static and Dynamic.

$CI8CM00

ISBT 128 Contatenation Mode = Static

$CI8CM01

ISBT 128 Concatenation Mode = Dynamic

176 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

ISBT 128 ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

ISBT 128 Dynamic Concatenation Timeout

Specifies the timeout used by the ISBT 128 Dynamic Concatenation Mode.

$CI8DT05

ISBT 128 Dynamic Concatenation Timeout = 50 msec

$CI8DT0A

ISBT 128 Dynamic Concatenation Timeout = 100 msec

$CI8DT14
ISBT 128 Dynamic Concatenation Timeout = 200
msec

$CI8DT32

ISBT 128 Dynamic Concatenation Timeout = 500 msec

$CI8DT4B

ISBT 128 Dynamic Concatenation Timeout = 750 msec

$CI8DT64

ISBT 128 Dynamic Concatenation Timeout = 1 second

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 177

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE 1D SYMBOLOGIES

ISBT 128 Force Concatenation

When enabled, this feature forces all ISBT 128 labels to be concatenated.

NOTE: This option is only valid when "ISBT 128 Concatenation" on page 176
is enabled.

$CI8FC00

ISBT 128 Force Contatenation = Disable

$CI8FC01

ISBT 128 Force Concatenation = Enable

ISBT 128 Advanced Concatenation Options

NOTE: Use the Datalogic Aladdin configuration application or Contact Cus-
tomer Support to set up pairs of label types for concatenation.

178 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

CODE 11 ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

CODE 11
The following options apply to the Code 11 symbology.

Code 11 Enable/Disable
When disabled, the reader will not read Code 11 bar codes.

$CC1EN00

Code 11 = Disable

$CC1EN01

Code 11 = Enable

Code 11 Check Character Calculation

This option enables/disables calculation and verification of optional Code 11 check
character.

$CC1CC00

Code 11 Check Character Calculation = Disable

$CC1CC01

Code 11 Check Character Calculation = Calculate Check C

$CC1CC02
Code 11 Check Character Calculation
= Calculate Check K

$CC1CC03
Code 11 Check Character Calculation
= Calculate Check C and K

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 179

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE 1D SYMBOLOGIES

Code 11 Check Character Transmission

This feature enables/disables transmission of an optional Code 11 check character.

$CC1CT00

Code 11 Check Character Transmission = Don’t Send

$CC1CT01

Code 11 Check Character Transmission = Send

Code 11 Length Control

This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for the
Code 11 symbology.
Variable Length: For variable-length decoding, a minimum length may be set.
Fixed Length: For fixed-length decoding, two different lengths may be set.

$CC1LC00

Code 11 Length Control = Variable Length

$CC1LC01

Code 11 Length Control = Fixed Length

180 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

CODE 11 ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Code 11 Set Length 1

This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for "Code 11 Length Control" on page
180. Length 1 is the minimum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first fixed
length if in Fixed Length Mode. Length includes the bar code’s check and data charac-
ters.
The length can be set from 2 to 50 characters. See "Set Length 1" on page 301 for more
detailed programming instructions.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO-

GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar
code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanu-
meric characters in Appendix D, Keypad represent-
Select Code 11 Length 1 Setting ing your desired character(s). End by scanning the
$CC1L1 ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort

and not save the entry string. You can then start
again at the beginning.
CANCEL

Length 1 = 04 (4 characters)

Code 11 Set Length 2

This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for "Code 11 Length Control" on page
180. Length 2 is the maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the second
fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode. Length includes the bar code’s check and data
characters.
The length can be set from 2 to 50 characters. A setting of 00 specifies to ignore this
length (only one fixed length). See "Set Length 2" on page 302 for more detailed pro-
gramming instructions.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO-

GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar
code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanu-
meric characters in Appendix D, Keypad represent-
Select Code 11 Length 2 Setting ing your desired character(s). End by scanning the
$CC1L2 ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort

and not save the entry string. You can then start
again at the beginning.
CANCEL

Length 2 = 50 (50 characters)

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 181

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE 1D SYMBOLOGIES

CODE 93
The following options apply to the Code 93 symbology.

Code 93 Enable/Disable
Enables/Disables ability of reader to decode Code 93 labels.

$CC9EN00

Code 93 = Disable

$CC9EN01

Code 93 = Enable

Code 93 Check Character Calculation

This option enables/disables calculation and verification of optional Code 93 check
character.

$CC9CC00

Code 93 Check Character Calculation = Disable

$CC9CC01

Code 93 Check Character Calculation = Calculate Check C

$CC9CC02
Code 93 Check Character Calculation
= Calculate Check K

$CC9CC03
Code 93 Check Character Calculation
= Calculate Check C and K

182 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

CODE 93 ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Code 93 Check Character Transmission

This feature enables/disables transmission of an optional Code 93 check character.

$CC9CT00
Code 93 Check Character Transmission = Don’t
Send

$CC9CT01

Code 93 Check Character Transmission = Send

Code 93 Length Control

This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for the
Code 93 symbology.
Variable Length: For variable-length decoding, a minimum length may be set.
Fixed Length: For fixed-length decoding, two different lengths may be set.

$CC9LC00

Code 93 Length Control = Variable Length

$CC9LC01

Code 93 Length Control = Fixed Length

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 183

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE 1D SYMBOLOGIES

Code 93 Set Length 1

This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for "Code 93 Length Control" on page
183. Length 1 is the minimum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first fixed
length if in Fixed Length Mode. Length includes the bar code’s check and data charac-
ters.
The length can be set from 1 to 50 characters. See "Set Length 1" on page 301 for more
detailed programming instructions.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO-

GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar
code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanu-
meric characters in Appendix D, Keypad represent-
Select Code 93 Length 1 Setting ing your desired character(s). End by scanning the
$CC9L1 ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort

and not save the entry string. You can then start
again at the beginning.
CANCEL

Length 1 = 01 (one character)

Code 93 Set Length 2

This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for "Code 93 Length Control" on page
183. Length 2 is the maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the second
fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode. The length includes the bar code’s check and data
characters.
The length can be set from 1 to 50 characters. A setting of 00 specifies to ignore this
length (only one fixed length). See "Set Length 2" on page 302 for more detailed pro-
gramming instructions.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO-

GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar
code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanu-
meric characters in Appendix D, Keypad represent-
Select Code 93 Length 2 Setting ing your desired character(s). End by scanning the
$CC9L2 ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort

and not save the entry string. You can then start
again at the beginning.
CANCEL

Length 2 = 50 (50 characters)

184 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

CODE 93 ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Code 93 Quiet Zones

This feature specifies the number of quiet zones for Code 93 labels. Quiet zones are
blank areas at the ends of a bar code and are typically 10 times the width of the narrow-
est bar or space in the label.

$CC9LO00

Code 93 Quiet Zones = No Quiet Zones

$CC9LO01

Code 93 Quiet Zones = Quiet Zone on one side

$CC9LO02

Code 93 Quiet Zones = Quiet Zones on two sides

$CC9LO03

Code 93 Quiet Zones = Auto

$CC9LO04

Code 93 Quiet Zones = Virtual Quiet Zones on two sides

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 185

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE 1D SYMBOLOGIES

MSI
The following options apply to the MSI symbology.

MSI Enable/Disable
Enables/Disables ability of reader to decode MSI labels.

$CMSEN00

MSI = Disable

$CMSEN01

MSI = Enable

MSI Check Character Calculation

Enables/Disables calculation and verification of an optional MSI check character.

$CMSCC00

MSI Check Character Calculation = Disable

$CMSCC01

MSI Check Character Calculation = Calculate Mod 10

$CMSCC02
MSI Check Character Calculation
= Calculate Mod 11/10

$CMSCC03
MSI Check Character Calculation
= Calculate Mod 10/10

186 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

MSI ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

MSI Check Character Transmission

Enables/disables transmission of an MSI check character.

$CMSCT00

MSI Check Character Transmission = Don’t Send

$CMSCT01

MSI Check Character Transmission = Send

MSI Length Control

This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for the
MSI symbology.
Variable Length: For variable-length decoding, a minimum length may be set.
Fixed Length: For fixed-length decoding, two different lengths may be set.

$CMSLC00

MSI Length Control = Variable Length

$CMSLC01

MSI Length Control = Fixed Length

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 187

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE 1D SYMBOLOGIES

MSI Set Length 1

This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for "MSI Length Control" on page 187.
Length 1 is the minimum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first fixed length
if in Fixed Length Mode. Length includes the bar code’s data characters only.
The length can be set from 1 to 50 characters. See "Set Length 1" on page 301 for more
detailed programming instructions.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO-

GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar
code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanu-
meric characters in Appendix D, Keypad represent-
Select MSI Length 1 Setting ing your desired character(s). End by scanning the
$CMSL1 ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort

and not save the entry string. You can then start
again at the beginning.
CANCEL

Length 1 = 01 (one character)

MSI Set Length 2

This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for "MSI Length Control" on page 187.
Length 2 is the maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the second fixed
length if in Fixed Length Mode. The length includes the bar code’s data characters only.
The length can be set from 1 to 50 characters. A setting of 00 specifies to ignore this
length (only one fixed length). See "Set Length 2" on page 302 for more detailed pro-
gramming instructions.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO-

GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar
code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanu-
meric characters in Appendix D, Keypad represent-
Select MSI Length 2 Setting ing your desired character(s). End by scanning the
$CMSL2 ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort

and not save the entry string. You can then start
again at the beginning.
CANCEL

Length 2 = 50 (50 characters)

188 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

PLESSEY ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

PLESSEY
The following options apply to the Plessey symbology.

Plessey Enable/Disable
Enables/Disables ability of reader to decode Plessey labels.

$CPLEN00

Plessey = Disable

$CPLEN01

Plessey = Enable

Plessey Check Character Calculation

Enables/Disables calculation and verification of a Plessey check character.

$CPLCC00

Plessey Check Character Calculation = Disable

$CPLCC01
Plessey Check Character Calculation
= Plessey std check char. verification

$CPLCC02
Plessey Check Character Calculation
= Anker check char. verification

$CPLCC03
Plessey Check Character Calculation
= Plessey std and Anker check char. verification

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 189

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE 1D SYMBOLOGIES

Plessey Check Character Transmission

Enables/disables transmission of a Plessey check character.

$CPLCT00

Plessey Check Character Transmission = Don’t Send

$CPLCT01

Plessey Check Character Transmission = Send

Plessey Length Control

This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for the
Plessey symbology.
Variable Length: For variable-length decoding, a minimum length may be set.
Fixed Length: For fixed-length decoding, two different lengths may be set.

$CPLLC00

Plessey Length Control = Variable Length

$CPLLC01

Plessey Length Control = Fixed Length

190 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

PLESSEY ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Plessey Set Length 1

This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for "Plessey Length Control" on page
190. Length 1 is the minimum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first fixed
length if in Fixed Length Mode. The length includes the bar code’s check and data char-
acters.
The length can be set from 1 to 50 characters. See "Set Length 1" on page 301 for more
detailed programming instructions.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO-

GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar
code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanu-
meric characters in Appendix D, Keypad represent-
Select Plessey Length 1 Setting ing your desired character(s). End by scanning the
$CPLL1 ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort

and not save the entry string. You can then start
again at the beginning.
CANCEL

Length 1 = 01 (one character)

Plessey Set Length 2

This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for "Plessey Length Control" on page
190. Length 2 is the maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the second
fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode. The length includes the bar code’s check and data
characters.
Length can be set from 1 to 50 characters. A setting of 00 specifies to ignore this length
(only one fixed length). See "Set Length 2" on page 302 for more detailed programming
instructions.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO-

GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar
code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanu-
meric characters in Appendix D, Keypad represent-
Select Plessey Length 2 Setting ing your desired character(s). End by scanning the
$CPLL2 ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort

and not save the entry string. You can then start
again at the beginning.
CANCEL

Length 2 = 50 (50 characters)

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 191

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE 1D SYMBOLOGIES

BC412
The following options apply to the BC412 symbology.

BC412 Enable/Disable
Enables/Disables ability of reader to decode BC412 labels.

$CBCEN00

BC412 = Disable

$CBCEN01

BC412 = Enable

BC412 Check Character Calculation

Enable this option to enable/disable calculation and verification of an optional BC412 check
character. When disabled, any check character in the label is treated as a data character.

$CBCCC00

BC412 Check Character Calculation = Disable

$CBCCC01

BC412 Check Character Calculation = Calculate

BC412 Length Control

This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for the
BC412 symbology.
Variable Length: For variable-length decoding, a minimum length may be set.
Fixed Length: For fixed-length decoding, two different lengths may be set.

$CBCLC00

BC412 Length Control = Variable Length

$CBCLC01

BC412 Length Control = Fixed Length

192 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

BC412 ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

BC412 Set Length 1

This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for "BC412 Length Control" on page
192. Length 1 is the minimum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first fixed
length if in Fixed Length Mode. Length includes the bar code’s data characters only.
The length can be set from 01 to 50 characters. See "Set Length 1" on page 301 for more
detailed programming instructions.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO-

GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar
code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanu-
meric characters in Appendix D, Keypad represent-
Select BC412 Length 1 Setting ing your desired character(s). End by scanning the
$CBCL1 ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort

and not save the entry string. You can then start
again at the beginning.
CANCEL

Length 1 = 01 (one character)

BC412 Set Length 2

This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for "BC412 Length Control" on page
192. Length 2 is the maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the second
fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode. Length includes the bar code’s data characters
only.
The length can be set from 01 to 50 characters. A setting of 00 specifies to ignore this
length (only one fixed length). See "Set Length 2" on page 302 for more detailed pro-
gramming instructions.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO-

GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar
code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanu-
meric characters in Appendix D, Keypad represent-
Select BC412 Length 2 Setting ing your desired character(s). End by scanning the
$CBCL2 ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort

and not save the entry string. You can then start
again at the beginning.
CANCEL

Length 2 = 50 (50 characters)

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 193

CONFIGURATION | 2D SYMBOLOGIES
SECTION CONTENTS
• 2D GLOBAL FEATURES starting on page 195 • PDF417 starting on page 211

• AZTEC CODE starting on page 199 • MICRO PDF417 starting on page 213

• CHINA SENSIBLE CODE starting on page 201 • QR CODE starting on page 216

• DATA MATRIX starting on page 203 • MICRO QR CODE starting on page 218

• GS1 DOTCODE starting on page 206 • UCC COMPOSITE starting on page 220

• MAXICODE starting on page 208 • PDF417 starting on page 211

The reader supports the following 2D symbologies (bar code types). Symbology-depen-
dent options for each symbology are included in this chapter.
See 1D Symbologies, starting on page 111 for configuration of 1D bar codes.

194 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

 2D GLOBAL FEATURES
The following features are common to all, or in some cases, most of the available 2D
symbologies. Default settings are indicated at each feature/option with a green arrow.
Also reference Appendix B, Standard Defaults for a listing of the most widely used set of
standard factory settings. That section also provides space to record any custom set-
tings needed or implemented for your system.
To set most features:

1. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING bar code at the top of applicable program-
ming pages.

2. Scan the correct bar code to set the desired programming feature or parameter.
You may need to cover unused bar codes on the page, and possibly the facing
page, to ensure that the reader reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

3. If additional input parameters are needed, go to Appendix D, Keypad, and scan the
appropriate characters from the keypad.

NOTE: Additional information about many features can be found in the

“References” chapter.
If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL bar code
to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the
beginning.

Complete the programming sequence by scanning the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING bar

code to exit Programming Mode.

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 195

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE 2D SYMBOLOGIES

2D Maximum Decoding Time

This feature specifies the maximum amount of time the software will spend attempting
to decode a 2D label. The selectable range is 10 milliseconds to 2.55 milliseconds.

$CDETP00

2D Maximum Decoding Time = Unlimited

$CDETP01

2D Maximum Decoding Time = Shortest

$CDETP02

2D Maximum Decoding Time = Short

$CDETP03

2D Maximum Decoding Time = Normal

$CDETP04

2D Maximum Decoding Time = Long

$CDETP05

2D Maximum Decoding Time = Longest

196 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

2D GLOBAL FEATURES ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

2D Structured Append
Enables/disables ability of reader to append multiple 2D Codes labels in a structured
format. The structured append property is globally applied to the following symbolo-
gies, if these are enabled:
• Data Matrix
• Aztec
• QR Code
• PDF 417

$CDESA00

Structured Append = Disable

$CDESA01

Structured Append = Enable

2D Normal/Inverse Symbol Control

Specifies the options available for decoding normal/negative printed 2D symbols. This
configuration item applies globally to all the 2D symbologies that support that feature
according to Standard AIM Specification: Data Matrix, QR, MicroQR, Aztec and Chinese
Sensible Code.

$CIPNR00

Normal/Inverse Symbol Control = Normal

$CIPNR02
Normal/Inverse Symbol Control = Both Normal and
Inverse

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 197

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE 2D SYMBOLOGIES

1D Normal/Inverse Symbol Control

Specifies the options available for decoding normal/negative printed symbols for 1D
barcodes.

$CIPLR00

Allow only Normal 1D Barcode

$CIPLR01

Allow only Inverse 1D Barcode

$CIPLR02

Allow both Normal and Inverse 1D Barcode

198 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

AZTEC CODE ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

AZTEC CODE

Aztec Code Enable / Disable

Enables/disables the ability of the reader to decode Aztec Code labels.

$CAZEN00

Aztec Code = Disable

$CAZEN01

Aztec Code = Enable

Aztec Code Length Control

This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for this
symbology.

Variable Length: For variable length decoding, a minimum and maximum length may
be set.

Fixed Length: For fixed length decoding, two different lengths may be set.

$CAZLC00

Aztec Code Length Control = Variable Length

$CAZLC01

Aztec Code Length Control = Fixed Length

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 199

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE 2D SYMBOLOGIES

Aztec Code Set Length 1

Specifies one of the bar code lengths for "Aztec Code Length Control" on page 199.
Length 1 is the minimum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first fixed length
if in Fixed Length Mode. Characters can be set from 0001 to 3,832 characters in incre-
ments of 0001 (pad with zeroes).
See "Set Length 1" on page 301 for detailed instructions on setting this feature.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO-

GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar
code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanu-
meric characters in Appendix D, Keypad represent-
Select Aztec Code Length 1 Setting ing your desired character(s). End by scanning the
$CAZL1 ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort

and not save the entry string. You can then start
again at the beginning.
CANCEL

0001 = Length 1 is 1 Character

Aztec Code Set Length 2

Specifies one of the bar code lengths for "Aztec Code Length Control" on page 199.
Length 2 is the minimum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first fixed length
if in Fixed Length Mode. Characters can be set from 0001 to 3,832 characters in incre-
ments of 0001 (pad with zeroes).
See "Set Length 2" on page 302 for detailed instructions on setting this feature.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO-

GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar
code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanu-
meric characters in Appendix D, Keypad represent-
Select Aztec Code Length 2 Setting ing your desired character(s). End by scanning the
$CAZL2 ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort

and not save the entry string. You can then start
again at the beginning.
CANCEL

Length 2 is 3,832 Characters

200 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

CHINA SENSIBLE CODE ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

CHINA SENSIBLE CODE

China Sensible Code Enable / Disable

Enables/disables the ability of the reader to decode China Sensible Code labels.

$CCSEN00

China Sensible Code = Disable

$CCSEN01

China Sensible Code = Enable

China Sensible Code Length Control

This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for this
symbology.

Variable Length: For variable length decoding, a minimum and maximum length may
be set.

Fixed Length: For fixed length decoding, two different lengths may be set.

$CCSLC00
China Sensible Code Length Control = Variable
Length

$CCSLC01

China Sensible Code Length Control = Fixed Length

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 201

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE 2D SYMBOLOGIES

China Sensible Code Set Length 1

Specifies one of the bar code lengths for "China Sensible Code Length Control" on page
201. Length 1 is the minimum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first fixed
length if in Fixed Length Mode. Characters can be set from 0001 to 7,827 characters in
increments of 0001 (pad with zeroes).
See "Set Length 1" on page 301 for detailed instructions on setting this feature.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO-

GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar
code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanu-
meric characters in Appendix D, Keypad represent-
Select China Sensible Code Length 1 Setting ing your desired character(s). End by scanning the
$CCSL1 ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort

and not save the entry string. You can then start
again at the beginning.
CANCEL

0001 = Length 1 is 1 Character

China Sensible Code Set Length 2

This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for "China Sensible Code Length Con-
trol" on page 201. Length 2 is the maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or
the second fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode. Characters can be set from 0001 to
7,827 characters in increments of 0001 (pad with zeroes).
See "Set Length 2" on page 302 for detailed instructions on setting this feature.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO-

GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar
code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanu-
meric characters in Appendix D, Keypad represent-
Select China Sensible Code Length 2 Setting ing your desired character(s). End by scanning the
$CCSL2 ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort

and not save the entry string. You can then start
again at the beginning.
CANCEL

Length 2 is 7,827 Characters

202 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

DATA MATRIX ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

DATA MATRIX

Data Matrix Enable / Disable

Enables/disables ability of reader to decode Data Matrix labels.

$CDMEN00

Data Matrix = Disable

$CDMEN01

Data Matrix = Enable

Data Matrix Square/Rectangular Style

Specifies the options available when reading Data Matrix with different form factors.
Choices are:
• Square Style
• Rectangular Style
• Both Square and Rectangular Style
The configuration item can also be configured as a bit mask to filter one or more Data
Matrix labels with different symbol size AND shape styles.

$CDMDM3FFF0BDF

Data Matrix Dimensions Mask = Square Style

$CDMDM0000F420

Data Matrix Dimensions Mask = Rectangular Style

$CDMDM3FFFFFFF
Data Matrix Dimensions Mask = Both Square and
Rectangular Style

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 203

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE 2D SYMBOLOGIES

Data Matrix Length Control

This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for this
symbology.

Variable Length: For variable length decoding, a minimum and maximum length may
be set.

Fixed Length: For fixed length decoding, two different lengths may be set.

$CDMLC00

Data Matrix Length Control = Variable Length

$CDMLC01

Data Matrix Length Control = Fixed Length

Data Matrix Set Length 1

This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for "Data Matrix Length Control" on
page 204. Length 1 is the minimum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first
fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode. Characters can be set from 0001 to 3,116 charac-
ters in increments of 0001 (pad with zeroes).
See "Set Length 1" on page 301 for detailed instructions on setting this feature.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO-

GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar
code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanu-
meric characters in Appendix D, Keypad represent-
Select Data Matrix Length 1 Setting ing your desired character(s). End by scanning the
$CDML1 ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort

and not save the entry string. You can then start
again at the beginning.
CANCEL

0001 = Length 1 is 1 Character

204 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

DATA MATRIX ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Data Matrix Set Length 2

This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for "Data Matrix Length Control" on
page 204. Length 2 is the maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the sec-
ond fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode. Characters can be set from 0001 to 3,116 char-
acters in increments of 0001 (pad with zeroes).
See "Set Length 2" on page 302 for detailed instructions on setting this feature.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO-

GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar
code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanu-
meric characters in Appendix D, Keypad represent-
Select Data Matrix Length 2 Setting ing your desired character(s). End by scanning the
$CDML2 ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort

and not save the entry string. You can then start
again at the beginning.
CANCEL

Length 2 is 3,116 Characters

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 205

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE 2D SYMBOLOGIES

GS1 DOTCODE
The following options apply for the DotCode barcode decoding

DotCode Enable
This options enables/disables the ability of the reader to decode DotCode barcodes.

$CDCEN01

DotCode = Enable

$CDCEN00

DotCode = Disable

DotCode High Resolution Enable

This options improves the decoding performance for very small module size barcodes,
e.g. tobacco products.

$CDCHS01

DotCode High Resolution = Enable

$CDCHS00

DotCode High Resolution = Disable

206 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

GS1 DOTCODE ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

DotCode Position-based Decoding

This option can improve the decoding performance when the next barcode to be
decoded is approximately shown in the same position as the previous one.

$CDCCP01

DotCode Position-based Decoding = Enable

$CDCCP00

DotCode Position-based Decoding = Disable

Additional Options
To improve performances the following additional settings are available using Aladdin
configuration utility, downloadable from [Link].
• Dot Size
• Fixed Length or Variable Length
• Min and Max barcode size

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 207

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE 2D SYMBOLOGIES

MAXICODE

Maxicode Enable / Disable

Enables/disables ability of reader to decode Maxicode labels.

$CMXEN00

Maxicode = Disable

$CMXEN01

Maxicode = Enable

Maxicode Primary Message Transmission

Enables/disables the transmission of only the Primary Message when the Secondary
Message is not readable.

$CMXPT00

Maxicode Primary Message Transmission = Disable

$CMXPT01

Maxicode Primary Message Transmission = Enable

208 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

MAXICODE ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Maxicode Length Control

This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for this
symbology.

Variable Length: For variable length decoding, a minimum and maximum length may
be set.

Fixed Length: For fixed length decoding, two different lengths may be set.

$CMXLC00

Maxicode Length Control = Variable Length

$CMXLC01

Maxicode Length Control = Fixed Length

Maxicode Set Length 1

Specifies one of the bar code lengths for "Maxicode Length Control" on page 209. Length
1 is the minimum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first fixed length if in
Fixed Length Mode. Characters can be set from 0001 to 0145 characters in increments
of 0001 (pad with zeroes).
See "Set Length 1" on page 301 for detailed instructions on setting this feature.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO-

GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar
code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanu-
meric characters in Appendix D, Keypad represent-
Select Maxicode Length 1 Setting ing your desired character(s). End by scanning the
$CMXL1 ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort

and not save the entry string. You can then start
again at the beginning.
CANCEL

0001 = Length 1 is 1 Character

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 209

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE 2D SYMBOLOGIES

Maxicode Set Length 2

This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for "Maxicode Length Control" on page
209. Length 2 is the maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the second
fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode. Characters can be set from 0001 to 0145 characters
in increments of 0001 (pad with zeroes).
See "Set Length 2" on page 302 for detailed instructions on setting this feature.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO-

GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar
code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanu-
meric characters in Appendix D, Keypad represent-
Select Maxicode Length 2 Setting ing your desired character(s). End by scanning the
$CMXL2 ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort

and not save the entry string. You can then start
again at the beginning.
CANCEL

Length 2 is 0145 Characters

210 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

PDF417 ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

PDF417

PDF417 Enable / Disable

Enables/disables the ability of the reader to decode PDF417 labels.

$CP4EN00

PDF417 = Disable

$CP4EN01

PDF417 = Enable

PDF417 Length Control

This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for this
symbology.

Variable Length: For variable length decoding, a minimum and maximum length may
be set.

Fixed Length: For fixed length decoding, two different lengths may be set.

$CP4LC00

PDF417 Length Control = Variable Length

$CP4LC01

PDF417 Length Control = Fixed Length

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 211

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE 2D SYMBOLOGIES

PDF417 Set Length 1

Specifies one of the bar code lengths for "PDF417 Length Control" on page 211. Length 1
is the minimum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first fixed length if in
Fixed Length Mode. Length includes the bar code’s data characters only. Characters can
be set from 0001 to 2,710 characters (pad with zeroes) in increments of 01. Any value
greater than 2,710 will be considered to be 2,710.
See"Set Length 1" on page 301 for detailed instructions on setting this feature.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO-

GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar
code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanu-
meric characters in Appendix D, Keypad represent-
Select PDF417 Length 1 Setting ing your desired character(s). End by scanning the
$CP4L1 ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort

and not save the entry string. You can then start
again at the beginning.
CANCEL

0001 = Length 1 is 1 Character

PDF417 Set Length 2

This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for "PDF417 Length Control" on page
211. Length 2 is the maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the second
fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode. Length includes the bar code’s check, data, and
full-ASCII shift characters. The length does not include start/stop characters. Characters
can be set from 01 to 2,710 characters (pad with zeroes) in increments of 01. Any value
greater than 2,710 will be considered to be 2,710.
See "Set Length 2" on page 302 for detailed instructions on setting this feature.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO-

GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar
code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanu-
meric characters in Appendix D, Keypad represent-
Select PDF417 Length 2 Setting ing your desired character(s). End by scanning the
$CP4L2 ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort

and not save the entry string. You can then start
again at the beginning.
CANCEL

Length 2 is 2,710 Characters

212 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

MICRO PDF417 ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

MICRO PDF417

Micro PDF417 Enable / Disable

Enables/disables the ability of the reader to decode Micro PDF417 labels.

$CMIEN00

Micro PDF417 = Disable

$CMIEN01

Micro PDF417 = Enable

Micro PDF417 Code 128 GS1-128 Emulation

Specifies which AIM ID to use for Micro PDF labels when doing Code 128 or GS1-128
emulation.
Emulation choices are:
• Micro PDF AIM ID and label type
• Code 128 / EAN128 AIM Id and label type.

$CMIU800
Micro PDF417 Code 128 GS1-128 Emulation =
Micro PDF AIM ID and label type

$CMIU801
Micro PDF417 Code 128 GS1-128 Emulation =
Code 128 / EAN128 AIM ID and label type

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 213

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE 2D SYMBOLOGIES

Micro PDF417 Length Control

This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for this
symbology.

Variable Length: For variable length decoding, a minimum and maximum length may
be set.

Fixed Length: For fixed length decoding, two different lengths may be set.

$CMILC00

Micro PDF417 Length Control = Variable Length

$CMILC01

Micro PDF417 Length Control = Fixed Length

Micro PDF417 Set Length 1

Specifies one of the bar code lengths for "Micro PDF417 Length Control" on page 214.
Length 1 is the minimum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first fixed length
if in Fixed Length Mode. Length includes the bar code’s data characters only. Characters
can be set from 0001 to 0366 characters (pad with zeroes) in increments of 01. Any
value greater than 0366 will be considered to be 0366.
See "Set Length 1" on page 301 for detailed instructions on setting this feature.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO-

GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar
code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanu-
meric characters in Appendix D, Keypad represent-
Select Micro PDF417 Length 1 Setting ing your desired character(s). End by scanning the
$CMIL1 ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort

and not save the entry string. You can then start
again at the beginning.
CANCEL

0001 = Length 1 is 1 Character

214 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

MICRO PDF417 ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Micro PDF417 Set Length 2

This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for "Micro PDF417 Length Control" on
page 214. Length 2 is the maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the sec-
ond fixed length if in Fixed Length includes the bar code’s data characters only. Charac-
ters can be set from 0001 to 0366 characters (pad with zeroes) in increments of 01. Any
value greater than 0366 will be considered to be 0366.
See "Set Length 2" on page 302 for detailed instructions on setting this feature.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO-

GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar
code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanu-
meric characters in Appendix D, Keypad represent-
Select Micro PDF417 Length 2 Setting ing your desired character(s). End by scanning the
$CMIL2 ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort

and not save the entry string. You can then start
again at the beginning.
CANCEL

Length 2 i s 0366 Characters

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 215

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE 2D SYMBOLOGIES

QR CODE

QR Code Enable / Disable

Enables/disables the ability of the reader to decode QR Code labels.

$CQREN00

QR Code = Disable

$CQREN01

QR Code = Enable

QR Code Length Control

This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for this
symbology.

Variable Length: For variable length decoding, a minimum and maximum length may
be set.

Fixed Length: For fixed length decoding, two different lengths may be set.

$CQRLC00

QR Code Length Control = Variable Length

$CQRLC01

QR Code Length Control = Fixed Length

216 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

QR CODE ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

QR Code Set Length 1

This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for "QR Code Length Control" on page
216. Length 1 is the minimum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first fixed
length if in Fixed Length Mode. Characters can be set from 0001 to 7,089 characters in
increments of 0001 (pad with zeroes).
See "Set Length 1" on page 301 for detailed instructions on setting this feature.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO-

GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar
code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanu-
meric characters in Appendix D, Keypad represent-
Select QR Code Length 1 Setting ing your desired character(s). End by scanning the
$CQRL1 ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort

and not save the entry string. You can then start
again at the beginning.
CANCEL

0001 = Length 1 is 1 Character

QR Code Set Length 2

This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for "QR Code Length Control" on page
216. Length 2 is the maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the second
fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode. Characters can be set from 0001 to 7,089 charac-
ters in increments of 0001 (pad with zeroes).
See "Set Length 2" on page 302 for detailed instructions on setting this feature.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO-

GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar
code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanu-
meric characters in Appendix D, Keypad represent-
Select QR Code Length 2 Setting ing your desired character(s). End by scanning the
$CQRL2 ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort

and not save the entry string. You can then start
again at the beginning.
CANCEL

Length 2 i s 7,089 Characters

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 217

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE 2D SYMBOLOGIES

MICRO QR CODE

Micro QR Code Enable / Disable

Enables/disables the ability of the reader to decode Micro QR Code labels.

$CMQEN00

Micro QR Code = Disable

$CMQEN01

Micro QR Code = Enable

Micro QR Code Length Control

This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for this
symbology.

Variable Length: For variable length decoding, a minimum and maximum length may
be set.

Fixed Length: For fixed length decoding, two different lengths may be set.

$CMQLC00

Micro QR Code Length Control = Variable Length

$CMQLC01

Micro QR Code Length Control = Fixed Length

218 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

MICRO QR CODE ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Micro QR Code Set Length 1

This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for "Micro QR Code Length Control" on
page 218. Length 1 is the minimum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first
fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode. Characters can be set from 0001 to 0035 characters
in increments of 0001 (pad with zeroes).
See "Set Length 1" on page 301 for detailed instructions on setting this feature.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO-

GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar
code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanu-
meric characters in Appendix D, Keypad represent-
Select Micro QR Code Length 1 Setting ing your desired character(s). End by scanning the
$CMQL1 ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort

and not save the entry string. You can then start
again at the beginning.
CANCEL

0001 = Length 1 is 1 Character

Micro QR Code Set Length 2

This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for "Micro QR Code Length Control" on
page 218. Length 2 is the maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the sec-
ond fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode. Characters can be set from 0001 to 0035 char-
acters in increments of 0001 (pad with zeroes).
See "Set Length 2" on page 302 for detailed instructions on setting this feature.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO-

GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar
code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanu-
meric characters in Appendix D, Keypad represent-
Select Micro QR Code Length 2 Setting ing your desired character(s). End by scanning the
$CMQL2 ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort

and not save the entry string. You can then start
again at the beginning.
CANCEL

Length 2 i s 0035 Characters

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 219

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE 2D SYMBOLOGIES

UCC COMPOSITE

UCC Optional Composite Timer

Specifies the amount of time the system will wait for the stacked part of a UCC Compos-
ite label before transmitting the linear label without an add-on.

$CCMOT00

UCC Optional Composite Timer = Timer Disabled

$CCMOT07

UCC Optional Composite Timer = 70 msec

$CCMOT01

UCC Optional Composite Timer = 100 msec

$CCMOT02

UCC Optional Composite Timer = 200 msec

$CCMOT03

UCC Optional Composite Timer = 300 msec

220 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

UCC COMPOSITE ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Postal Code Selection

Enables/disables the ability of the reader to decode labels of a specific postal symbol-
ogy.
• Disable All Postal Codes • Australia Post
• Postnet • Japan Post
• Planet • IMB
• Royal Mail • Sweden Post
• Kix • Portugal Post

$CPOEN00

Postal Code Selection = Disable All Postal Codes

$CPOEN01

Postal Code Selection = Enable Postnet

$CPOEN02

Postal Code Selection = Enable Planet

$CPOEN03

Postal Code Selection = Enable Royal Mail

$CPOEN04

Postal Code Selection = Enable Kix

$CPOEN05

Postal Code Selection = Enable Australia Post

$CPOEN06

Postal Code Selection = Enable Japan Post

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 221

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE 2D SYMBOLOGIES

Postal Code Selection (continued)

$CPOEN07

Postal Code Selection = Enable IMB

$CPOEN08

Postal Code Selection = Enable Sweden Post

$CPOEN09

Postal Code Selection = Enable Portugal Post

Postnet BB Control
Controls the ability of the reader to decode B and B' fields of Postnet labels.

$CPOBB00

Postnet BB Control = Disable

$CPOBB01

Postnet BB Control = Enable

222 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

CONFIGURATION | DISPLAY AND KEYBOARD
FEATURES

SECTION CONTENTS
DISPLAY AND KEYBOARD FEATURES starting on page 224

• Display Operating Mode • Enable/disable buttons

• Display Off Timeout • Arrow Keys Mode (4-key models only)
• Backlight Enable • Arrow Up String (4-key models only)
• Font Size • Arrow Down String (4-key models only)

CONFIGURE ACTIONS FOR FUNCTION KEYS starting on page 230

ACTION CONFIGURATION FOR FUNCTION KEYS starting on page 231

• Function Keys Configuration for 16-key Models • Define Strings

Only
• Function Keys Configuration for 4-key Models
Only

ADDITIONAL FEATURES FOR 16-KEY MODELS starting on page 235

• Last Code Shown Timeout • Interkey Timeout

• Display Time Stamping Mode • Append Code
• Mode Selection • Echo
• Quantity Field • Keypress Sound
• Quantity/Code Send Mode • Lower Case
• Quantity/Code Separator • Set Function Key Labels

BARCODE/KEY DIFFERENT DATA FORMAT starting on page 243

• Set Barcode Header • Set String ID

• Set Barcode Terminator • Set String Header
• Set Key Sequence ID • Set String Terminator
• Set Key Sequence Header • Barcode/Key Different Data Format
• Set Key Sequence Terminator

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 223

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE DISPLAY AND KEYBOARD FEATURES

DISPLAY AND KEYBOARD FEATURES

Two keyboard models are available, the 4-key model and the 16-key model. The following
section contains configuration parameters that are common and applicable to both keypad
models, unless specifically labeled as "4-key models only" or "16-key models only”.
For more items for the 16-key model, see Additional Features for 16-key Models, starting
on page 235.

Display Operating Mode

Select the operating mode of the display. Options are:
• Normal Mode: Display not cleared, no echo of the code on Display.
• Local Echo: Display cleared after decode, echo of the code on display.
• Clear display after decode: Display is cleared after decode, no echo.

$CDIMD00

Normal Mode = Display not cleared

$CDIMD01

Local echo mode

$CDIMD02

Clear display after decode

Display Off Timeout

Sets the timeout for display, backlight and keyboard.

$CDIOT00

Display Off Timeout = Disabled

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO-

GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code
at left followed by two digits (01-99 sec.) from the
Alphanumeric characters in Appendix D, Keypad rep-
Set Display Off Timeout
resenting your desired character(s). End by scanning
$CDIOT
the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort

and not save the entry string. You can then start again
at the beginning.
CANCEL

08 = 8 second delay

224 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

BACKLIGHT ENABLE ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Backlight Enable
Enables/Disables the keyboard backlight.

$CDIBL00

Backlight Disabled

$CDIBL03

Backlight Enabled

Font Size
Select the font size.

$CDIFS00

Font Size = Small

$CDIFS01

Font Size = Medium

$CDIFS02

Font Size = Large

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 225

Enable/disable buttons
This feature offers the ability to enable or disable the keypad.
It is possible to set values ​​between 0x0000 to 0xFFFF. Each bit corresponds to the
enabling (value 1) or disabling (value 0) of a key [the values ​​are a mask associated with
each key 1111 1111 1111 1111].
For 4-key models, the valid range for enabling/disabling the keys is from 0x0000 to
0xF000.
The association between the bits and the keys is illustrated in the following table:
BIT 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

16 Keys Shift F4 4 8 F1 1 5 9 F2 2 6 0 F3 3 7 Enter

4 Keys Up F2 F1 Down

Figure 9 - PM96XX 4-key and 16-key Models

226 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

KEY PROGRAMMING ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Key Programming

$CPWFZFFFF

All keys enabled

$CPWFZ0000

All keys disabled

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO-

GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code
at left followed by 4 digits from the Alphanumeric
characters in Appendix D, Keypad.
Enable a combination of keys
$CPWFZ

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort

and not save the entry string. You can then start
again at the beginning.
CANCEL

In the following table an example of key programming:

Enable only “Shift”, “1”, e “F1” :

BIT 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

16 Keys Shift F4 4 8 F1 1 5 9 F2 2 6 0 F3 3 7 Enter

Binary 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Hex 8 C 0 0

The desired characters are: 8 C 0 0

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 227

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE DISPLAY AND KEYBOARD FEATURES

Arrow Keys Mode (4-key models only)

Configure the Arrow Keys functionality type. Two options are available:

Function Keys Action Select mode: When in this mode, arrow keys are used to select
one of the 3 possible actions associated to the Function Keys. To associate actions to the
Function keys, see Configure Actions for Function Keys, starting on page 230.

String Association Mode: When in this mode, each one of the arrow keys can be pro-
grammed to display and transmit a pre-defined string.

$CDIAC00

SHIFT Mode

$CDIAC01

STRING Mode

Arrow Up String (4-key models only)

Associate a pre-defined string to the Arrow Up key

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO-

GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code
at left. Define the label string by further scanning 32
digits from the Alphanumeric characters in
Set string for Arrow Up Key Appendix D, Keypad.
$CDAUS The digits must be the hexadecimal ASCII represen-
tation of the desired characters; if less than the
expected string of 16 characters are selected, scan
the ENTER/EXIT bar code to terminate the string.
End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort

and not save the entry string. You can then start
again at the beginning.
CANCEL

0x3D000000000000000000000000000000

228 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

ARROW DOWN STRING (4-KEY MODELS ONLY) ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Arrow Down String (4-key models only)

Associate a pre-defined string to the Arrow Down key

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO-

GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code
at left. Define the label string by further scanning 32
digits from the Alphanumeric characters in
Set string for Arrow Down Key Appendix D, Keypad.
$CDADS The digits must be the hexadecimal ASCII represen-
tation of the desired characters; if less than the
expected string of 16 characters are selected, scan
the ENTER/EXIT bar code to terminate the string.
End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort

and not save the entry string. You can then start
again at the beginning.
CANCEL

0x44776000000000000000000000000000

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 229

CONFIGURE ACTIONS FOR FUNCTION KEYS
Each of the function keys can be programmed to perform a user-assigned function. This
is done by associating a function key with either a predefined command or your own
custom string. See the "Define Strings" on page 234 command to define customized
strings.
Each function key has an associated label which shows in the display when active. The
default labels are shown in the table below. To program the function key labels, see "Set
String ID" on page 245
The following table shows the list of predefined commands and available strings.

Table 5 - Keyboard Programming

DEFAULT
CMD_ID NAME FUNCTION 16K 4K
LABEL
Not configured action.
If a key must be kept enabled but
isn’t required in normal mode , this
function can be selected to keep it
00 Not configured <None>
ineffective. Whenever an unconfig-
ured function key is pressed, an
error message appears on the dis-
play and an error beep is emitted.
01 Enter CMD Same as ENTER_KEY.
02 String 1 Display and transmit string 1.
03 String 2 Display and transmit string 2.
v

04 String 3 Display and transmit string 3.

05 String 4 Display and transmit string 4.

06 String 5 Display and transmit string 5.

07 Backlight CMD Toggle backlight on/off.

08 Clear CMD Clears the screen.

09 Backspace CMD Same as Backspace key.

If pressed once, it recalls the last
code sent out.
0A Recall
If pressed twice, resends the last
code.
0B Show Date/Time Display the internal date, time.

0C Scroll Up Scroll up display content by row.

0D Scroll Down Scroll down display content by row.

0E Dot char Display dot [.] char.

0F Dynamic Quantity Dynamic Quantity Code function.

Switch between numeric and
10 Shift action
alphanumeric mode

230 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

ARROW DOWN STRING (4-KEY MODELS ONLY) ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

ACTION CONFIGURATION FOR FUNCTION KEYS

Configure actions for the function keys.

Table 6 - Default Action Keys

16K 4K
F1 07 Backlight 02 String 1

F2 0E Dot char 03 String 2

F3 09 Backspace CMD N.A.

F4 08 Clear N.A.

Shift 10 Shift N.A.

To configure the following features, follow the procedure below:

1. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code above.
2. Scan the bar code for the Function Key you want to program.
3. Determine the CMD_ID number from Table 5 on page 230.
4. Scan the corresponding 2 digits from the Alphanumeric characters in Appendix D,
Keypad.
5. End the procedure by scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

$CKF11

Configures Action for F1

$CKF21

Configures Action for F2

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort

and not save the entry string. You can then start
again at the beginning.
CANCEL

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 231

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE DISPLAY AND KEYBOARD FEATURES

Function Keys Configuration for 16-key Models Only

Function Keys F3 through Shift are available on 16-key models only. For more 16-key
programming, see "Additional Features for 16-key Models" on page 235.

$CKF31

Configures Action for F3

$CKF41

Configures Action for F4

$CKF51

Configures Action for Shift

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort

and not save the entry string. You can then start
again at the beginning.
CANCEL

232 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

FUNCTION KEYS CONFIGURATION FOR 4-KEY MODELS ONLY ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Function Keys Configuration for 4-key Models Only

The following settings are available only for 4-key models when configured in Function
Keys Action Select mode on page 228.

$CKF12

Configure 2nd Action for F1

$CKF13

Configure 3rd Action for F1

$CKF22

Configure 2nd Action for F2

$CKF23

Configure 3rd Action for F2

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort

and not save the entry string. You can then start
again at the beginning.
CANCEL

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 233

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE DISPLAY AND KEYBOARD FEATURES

DEFINE STRINGS

Configure string 1-5.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code at the
top of the page, then the bar code for the String you want to set. Define the label string
by scanning 32 digits from the Alphanumeric characters in Appendix D, Keypad.
The digits must be the hexadecimal ASCII representation of the desired characters; if
less than the expected string of 16 characters are selected, scan the ENTER/EXIT bar
code to terminate the string.
End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

$CPWEP

Set String 1

$CPWEO

Set String 2

$CPWEA

Set String 3

$CPWEM

Set String 4

$CPWEL

Set String 5

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort

and not save the entry string. You can then start
again at the beginning.
CANCEL

234 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

LAST CODE SHOWN TIMEOUT ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

ADDITIONAL FEATURES FOR 16-KEY MODELS

See also "Function Keys Configuration for 16-key Models Only" on page 232.

Last Code Shown Timeout

After the code transmission, the last code read will be shown on the display for a config-
urable timeout. If it is set to 00 it means that the code is not deleted from the display
even at the Display Off Timeout.
NOTE: The standard DISPLAY OFF TIMEOUT (see page 224) has a higher pri-
ority than the LAST CODE SHOWN TIMEOUT, so the two parameters should
be combined to get the desired result.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO-

GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code
at left followed by 2 digits (00-99 sec. by 01) from the
Alphanumeric characters in Appendix D, Keypad.
Last Code Shown Timeout
End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.
$CDIST

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort

and not save the entry string. You can then start
again at the beginning.
CANCEL

 2 seconds

Display Time Stamping Mode

Time Stamping Mode can be applied when entering data from either a barcode, from
the keyboard, or both.

$CDITS00

Applied to both

$CDITS01

Applied only to barcode data

$CDITS02

Applied only to keyboard data

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 235

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE DISPLAY AND KEYBOARD FEATURES

Mode Selection
This feature allows the PowerScan 16K model to operate in one of two basic operative
modes:
• Normal Mode — data entered, either on the keypad or read via barcode, is trans-
mitted to the host once the enter key is pressed, following the configured format-
ting.
• Quantity/Code Mode — Can be further configured. See the next sections for Qty/
Code operations.

$CDISM00

Set Normal Mode

$CDISM01

Set Qty Code Mode

Quantity Field
This feature defines the behavior of the scanner if no data is entered in the QTY field so
that it is left empty. Options are:
• code is transmitted with default QTY (‘1’)
• code is transmitted alone (without any quantity information)
• code is discarded and an error beep is generated

$CPWEK00

Transmit code with default qty (‘1’)

$CPWEK01

Transmit Code only

$CPWEK02

Discard Code

236 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

QUANTITY/CODE SEND MODE ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Quantity/Code Send Mode

This feature defines the rules that will be used to send a QTY/CODE pair:
0. Code is transmitted with QTY field (and its predefined format) preceding CODE
field (and its predefined format)
1. Code is transmitted with CODE field (and its predefined format) preceding QTY
field (and its predefined format)
2. Code in CODE field is sent out for the number of times defined in the QTY field

$CPWEH00

Qty precedes Code

$CPWEH01

Code precedes Qty

$CPWEH02

Code transmitted Qty times

Quantity/Code Separator
This feature allows the insertion of a separator between Qty/Code pairs.

$CPWQP00

No separator
To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO-
GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the barcode
at left. Next scan 1 digit from Appendix D, Keypad (in
the range 1-8) representing the number of charac-
Set Qty/Code string separator ters to be used as separator.
$CPWQP Finally, define the separator string by reading the
desired characters from the ASCII table at the back
of this manual, expressed in hexadecimal form. End
by scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 237

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE DISPLAY AND KEYBOARD FEATURES

Interkey Timeout
The 16-key keypad is organized like a cell phone, with multi-tap access to alpha charac-
ters on numeric keys. In alphabetic mode (entered by toggling the SHIFT key), the keys
must be pressed once, twice, or more to obtain the desired letter.
This command allows you to specify the time which occurs between a key press, and the
confirmation of the letter by the scanner (when in alpha mode). The timeout can be
configured in increments of 0.5 second.

$CPWNT00

0.5 seconds

$CPWNT01

1.0 seconds

$CPWNT02

1.5 seconds

$CPWNT03

2.0 seconds

238 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

APPEND CODE ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Append Code
This function defines how a scanned barcode interacts with a pre-edited CODE field, or
with a string entered by a preprogrammed FUNC KEY.
Options are:
0. Barcode data overwrites what is written in the CODE field by keyboard and the
code is transmitted;
1. Barcode data is appended to any text in the CODE field and the code is transmitted;
2. Barcode data is appended to any text in the CODE field but the code IS NOT trans-
mitted. Data is transmitted when the enter key is pressed.
3. Barcode data is appended to any text in the CODE field and the code is transmitted
if Function Key's string has CR.

$CPWFW00

Overwrite always

$CPWFW01

Append and transmit

$CPWFW02

Append and don’t transmit

$CPWFW03

Append and transmit if Function Key's string has CR

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 239

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE DISPLAY AND KEYBOARD FEATURES

Echo
This function enables/disables the keypad echo. It works only when the scanner is in
simple data input mode (no QTY/CODE).

$CPWKE00

Full Keypad echo

$CPWKE01

No echo on function key

$CPWKE02

No echo on any key

Keypress Sound
Enables/disables the KEY press sound (‘click’).

$CPWEI00

Disable

$CPWEI01

Enable

240 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

LOWER CASE ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Lower Case
This function enables/disables the capability to use the SHIFT key to switch to Lower
Case (alphanumeric) mode. When enabled, the indication in the upper right corner of
display is ‘ab’.

$CPWSA00

Disable Lower Case

$CPWSA01

Enable Lower Case

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 241

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE DISPLAY AND KEYBOARD FEATURES

Set Function Key Labels

This item allows the user to change the default mnemonic label associated to each indi-
vidual function key. This is done by programming a short acronym 4-character string to
be shown in the bottom of the display. The purpose of the label is to serve as an indica-
tion of the programmed function of the Function Key below it.
For 16-Key models and all function keys, only characters from 1 to 4 are considered.
For 4-Key models, characters from 5 to 8 and from 9 to 12 are used for “Set F1 label”
and “Set F2 label” only if the scanner has been configured with "Function Keys Action
Select mode:" on page 228. Characters from 5 to 8 are used to set the string that will be
displayed in the legend for 2nd Action for F1 and 2nd Action for F2. Characters from 9 to
12 are used to set the 3rd Action string for F1 and the 3rd Action string for F2.
For all the parameters below, read the command followed by up to 24 digits represent-
ing 12 ASCII characters from Appendix D, Keypad.
When these parameters are set to default the device displays an icon as shown in
Table 5 on page 230.

$CPWSB

Set F1 label

0x000000000000000000000000

$CPWSC

Set F2 label

0x000000000000000000000000

$CPWSD

Set F3 label

0x000000000000000000000000

$CPWSE

Set F4 label

0x000000000000000000000000

242 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

SET BARCODE HEADER ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

BARCODE/KEY DIFFERENT DATA FORMAT

If this parameter is enabled, barcode and keyboard entered data can be formatted sepa-
rately. More specifically: if this parameter is disabled, barcode and keyboard data will
share the same Header and Terminator defined using “Set Barcode Header” and “Set
Barcode Terminator” below. If this parameter is enabled, keyboard entered data are
treated differently, as their format must be programmed through the parameters Set
String Header, Set String Terminator, Set Key Sequence Header and Set Key Sequence
Terminator.

$CPWDF00

Disable

$CPWDF01

Enable

Set Barcode Header

Sets the header for barcode and keyboard composed strings.
To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO-
GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code
at left followed by 32 digits from the Alphanumeric
characters in Appendix D, Keypad. The digits must
Set barcode header be the hexadecimal ASCII representation of the
$CPWBH desired characters.
If less than the expected string of 16 characters are
selected, scan the ENTER/EXIT bar code to terminate
the string. If the first 2 digits are 0, the feature is dis-
abled. End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code
again.

Set Barcode Terminator

Sets the terminator for barcode and keyboard composed strings.
To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO-
GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code
at left followed by 32 digits from the Alphanumeric
characters in Appendix D, Keypad. The digits must
Set barcode terminator be the hexadecimal ASCII representation of the
$CPWBT desired characters.
If less than the expected string of 16 characters are
selected, scan the ENTER/EXIT bar code to terminate
the string. If the first 2 digits are 0, the feature is dis-
abled. End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code
again.

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 243

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE DISPLAY AND KEYBOARD FEATURES

Set Key Sequence ID

Sets the identifier for keyboard composed strings.
To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO-
GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code
at left followed by 6 digits from Appendix D, Keypad.
The ID characters must be represented by their
Set keys sequence ID hexadecimal ASCII code; if the first 2 digits are 0, this
$CPWEC feature is disabled. End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT
bar code again.

Set Key Sequence Header

Sets the header for keyboard composed strings.
To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO-
GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code
at left followed by 32 digits from the Alphanumeric
characters in Appendix D, Keypad. The digits must
Set key sequence header be the hexadecimal ASCII representation of the
$CPWE1 desired characters.
If less than the expected string of 16 characters are
selected, scan the ENTER/EXIT bar code to terminate
the string.
If the first 2 digits are 0, the feature is disabled. End
by scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

Set Key Sequence Terminator

Sets the terminator for keyboard composed strings.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO-

GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code
at left followed by 32 digits from the Alphanumeric
characters in Appendix D, Keypad. The digits must
Set key sequence terminator be the hexadecimal ASCII representation of the
$CPWE2 desired characters.
If less than the expected string of 16 characters are
selected, scan the ENTER/EXIT bar code to terminate
the string.
If the first 2 digits are 0, the feature is disabled. End
by scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

244 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

SET STRING ID ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Set String ID
Sets the identifier of the predefined strings.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO-

GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then scan the bar
code at left and then read 6 digits representing 3
Set String ID ASCII characters from the Appendix D, Keypad.
$CPWEB

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort

and not save the entry string. You can then start
again at the beginning.
CANCEL

0x00000000000000000000000000000000

Set String Header

Sets the header of the predefined strings.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO-

GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code
at left, and then read 32 digis representing 16 ASCII
characters in Appendix D, Keypad.
Set String Header The digits must be the hexadecimal ASCII represen-
$CPWED tation of the desired characters. If less than the
expected string of 16 characters are selected, scan
the ENTER/EXIT bar code to terminate the string.
If the first 2 digits are 0, the feature is disabled. End
by scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort

and not save the entry string. You can then start
again at the beginning.
CANCEL

0x00000000000000000000000000000000

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 245

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE DISPLAY AND KEYBOARD FEATURES

Set String Terminator

Sets the terminator of the predefined strings.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO-

GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code
at left, and then read 32 digits representing 16 ASCII
characters in Appendix D, Keypad.
Set String Terminator The digits must be the hexadecimal ASCII represen-
$CPWEF tation of the desired characters. If less than the
expected string of 16 characters are selected, scan
the ENTER/EXIT bar code to terminate the string.
If the first 2 digits are 0, the feature is disabled. End
by scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort

and not save the entry string. You can then start
again at the beginning.
CANCEL

0x00000000000000000000000000000000

246 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

CONFIGURATION | OCR DECODING
The GX45 bar code family is equipped with an Optical Character Recognition feature.
This section describes how to configure the Datalogic bar code reader to enable OCR
decoding.
The Gx45 models support the following OCR font types:
• OCR-A
• OCR-B
• MICR E13B
• US Currency Serial Number.
In most OCR applications a suitable usage of check digits and the addition of constraints
on sub-strings types (e.g. digits-only or letter-only) reduces misdecoding probabilities.
The user can choose between a set of predefined templates (already optimized for
decoding) and customizable free templates.
For free templates, as OCR decoding is less reliable than traditional barcode decoding,
the reader provides tools to minimize misdecoded labels. As a result, particular care
shall be dedicated to the setup of free custom templates to reduce incorrect output.
For more information on how to customize the user templates for your needs, please
contact Datalogic Technical Support.
Use one of the following labels to enable one of the predefined templates for OCR
decoding.

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 247

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE OCR DECODING

OCR Decoding Predefined Templates

The following selections are exclusive, enabling one template automatically disables the
others.

$COCEN00000000

OCR Predefined Template = Disable OCR Function

$COCEN00000001

OCR Predefined Template = EU Identity Card OCR

$COCEN00000002

OCR Predefined Template = IATA Passport OCR

$COCEN00000004

OCR Predefined Template = Italian Post OCR Payment

$COCEN00000008
OCR Predefined Template = Italian Bank
Freccia Bank Payment form

$COCEN00000010

OCR Predefined Template = Swiss Driving License OCR

248 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

CONFIGURATION | MOTION FEATURES
SECTION CONTENTS
MOTION FEATURES starting on page 249

• Motionless Timeout • Motion Aiming Control

• Motion Sensitivity

Use this chapter to configure motion settings for the handheld.

Reference Appendix B, for a listing of standard factory settings.

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 249

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE MOTION FEATURES

Motionless Timeout
The period of time that must expire without detecting any motion, before the reader is
assumed to be in a motionless condition. The selectable setting is from 500 to 25,500
milliseconds in 100 millisecond increments. This option relates to such features as
Aimer On and Stand Mode/Object Detection scanning with respect to motion.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO-

GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar
code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanu-
meric characters in Appendix D, Keypad represent-
Select Motionless Timeout ing your desired character(s). End by scanning the
$CMOTO ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort

and not save the entry string. You can then start
again at the beginning.
CANCEL

020 = Motionless Timeout = 2 seconds

Motion Sensitivity
Sets the sensitivity level for motion detection wakeup. Choices are low, medium and
high.

$CMOSY00

Motion Sensitivity = Low

$CMOSY01

Motion Sensitivity = Medium

$CMOSY02

Motion Sensitivity = High

250 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

MOTION FEATURES ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Motion Aiming Control

Enables/Disables the Aiming system when motion is detected.

$CMOMD00

Motion Aiming Control = Disable

$CMOMD01

Motion Aiming Control = Enable

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 251

CONFIGURATION | POWER MANAGEMENT
SECTION CONTENTS
POWER SAVE starting on page 253

• Powerdown Timeout

BATTERY PROFILES starting on page 254

• Battery Profiles • Battery Information

These parameters refer to Mobile units only (PM96XX models).

252 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

POWER SAVE ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

POWER SAVE

Powerdown Timeout
The Powerdown Timeout feature sets the time for automatically switching the unit off
when the imager has been idle.

$CSLPS00

Powerdown Timeout = Disable

$CSLPS01

Powerdown Timeout = 10 minutes

$CSLPS02

Powerdown Timeout = 20 minutes

$CSLPS03

Powerdown Timeout = 30 minutes

$CSLPS06

Powerdown Timeout = 60 minutes (1 hour)

$CSLPS0C

Powerdown Timeout = 120 minutes (2 hours)

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 253

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE POWER MANAGEMENT

BATTERY PROFILES

Battery Profiles
PowerScan PM96XX provides the user the ability to select different usage profiles to
better configure the reader with respect to specific needs. By default, the Maximum
Performance profile is selected and provides high snappiness and max reading capabil-
ity. The user can then decide to exploit specific features when others are considered less
important, for instance: fast battery recharge instead of battery health, maximum read-
ing performance instead of battery autonomy, etc.
The following Battery Profiles are described with associated benefits and limitations:

$CBCHP00

Battery Profile = Maximum Performance

$CBCHP01

Battery Profile = Maximum Battery Health

$CBCHP02

Battery Profile = Maximum Autonomy

$CBCHP03

Battery Profile = Fast Charge

254 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

 Maximum Performance (default)
• Reader autonomy for heavy workload
• Motionix™ enabled
• Max radio communication performances

Maximum Battery Health

• Battery capacity is preserved
• Reduced max charging current
• Reduced battery capacity by ~20%
• Increased recharge time: +20% on average (it depends on the specific reader configu-
ration)

Maximum Autonomy
• Max reader autonomy
• Motionix™ disabled
• Vibro motor disabled
• Reduced Radio Star™ responsivenessa

Fast Charge
• Reduced recharge time (approx. 20%)
• Motionix™ disabled
• Vibro motor disabled

a. Host commands from cradle, asynchronous data from cradle, paging button will not be received; out-of-range sig-
naling will not work, configuration exchange will not be executed automatically (only after trigger pressure).
Host download of the hand-held not placed on the base will not work.

Battery Information
By using Datalogic Aladdin utility, additional battery data can be retrieved, i.e.:
• HH Serial Number
• Charge %
• Health %
• Full Charge Capacity
• Designed Capacity
• Nominal Capacity
• Remaining Capacity
• Discharging Counter
• Charging Status
• Charging (base station) Battery Voltage
• Battery Current
• Manufacturer Date
• Battery Serial Number
• Battery Model Number
If more than one reader is connected to a base station, battery data will be retrieved for
each reader.

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 255

CONFIGURATION | WIRELESS FEATURES
SECTION CONTENTS
WIRELESS BEEPER FEATURES starting on page 257

•Good Transmission Beep •Disconnect Beep

•Beeper Frequency •Docking (Connecting) Beep
•Beep Duration •Leash Alarm
•Beep Volume
CONFIGURATION UPDATES starting on page 262

•Automatic Configuration Update •Copy Configuration to Base Station

•Copy Configuration to Reader
BATCH FEATURES starting on page 263

•Batch Mode •Erase Batch Memory

•Send Batch •RF Batch Mode Transmit Delay
DIRECT RADIO AUTOLINK starting on page 265

•Direct Radio Autolink

RF ADDRESS STAMPING starting on page 266

•Source Radio Address Transmission •Source Radio Address Delimiter Character

FEATURES FOR STAR MODELS ONLY starting on page 267

•STAR Radio Protocol Timeout •STAR System Speed

•STAR Radio Transmit Mode •STAR Frequency Agility

256 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

WIRELESS BEEPER FEATURES ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

WIRELESS BEEPER FEATURES

Several options are available to configure beeper behavior for RF operation.

Good Transmission Beep

Enables/disables the Good Transmission Beep indication. When enabled, a beep occurs
when a Label is correctly transmitted to the base.

$CBTAB00

Good Transmission Beep = Disable

$CBTAB01

Good Transmission Beep = Enable

Beeper Frequency
Adjusts radio-specific beep indications to sound at a low, medium or high frequency,
selectable from the list below (controls the beeper’s pitch/tone).

$CBTBF00

Beep Frequency = Low

$CBTBF01

Beep Frequency = Medium

$CBTBF02

Beep Frequency = High

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 257

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE WIRELESS FEATURES

Beep Duration
This feature controls the duration of radio-specific beep indications.

$CBTBD06

Beep Duration = 60 msec

$CBTBD08

Beep Duration = 80 msec

$CBTBD0A

Beep Duration = 100 msec

$CBTBD0C

Beep Duration = 120 msec

$CBTBD0E

Beep Duration = 140 msec

$CBTBD10

Beep Duration = 160 msec

$CBTBD12

Beep Duration = 180 msec

$CBTBD14

Beep Duration = 200 msec

258 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

WIRELESS BEEPER FEATURES ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Beep Volume
Selects the beeper volume (loudness) of radio-specific beep indications. There are three
selectable volume levels.

$CBTBV00

Beep Volume = Low

$CBTBV01

Beep Volume = Medium

$CBTBV02

Beep Volume = High

Disconnect Beep
Enables/disables the beep indication that a handheld has become disconnected from a
Base Station.

$CBTDB00

Disconnect Beep = Disable

$CBTDB01

Disconnect Beep = Enable

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 259

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE WIRELESS FEATURES

Docking (Connecting) Beep

Enables/disables a beep indication when the handheld is placed in the Base Station.

$CBTCB00

Docking Beep = Disable

$CBTCB01

Docking Beep = Enable

Leash Alarm
This setting specifies the number of seconds to sound the Leash Mode beeps (three per
second) when the handheld goes out of range. This is especially useful in instances
where the reader might inadvertently have been placed in a bag or cart.
For this mode to be effective, the reader must be linked to the Base Station. If the
reader is asleep or disconnected from the Base Station, there is no way for it to know
where it is relative to the Base Station because communication is not active between
the devices.

$CBTLB00

Leash Alarm = Disable

$CBTLB01

Leash Alarm = 1 Second

$CBTLB02

Leash Alarm = 2 Seconds

$CBTLB03

Leash Alarm = 3 Seconds

260 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

WIRELESS BEEPER FEATURES ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Leash Alarm (continued)

$CBTLB04

Leash Alarm = 4 Seconds

$CBTLB05

Leash Alarm = 5 Seconds

$CBTLB0A

Leash Alarm = 10 Seconds

$CBTLB19

Leash Alarm = 25 Seconds

$CBTLB1E

Leash Alarm = 30 Seconds

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 261

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE WIRELESS FEATURES

CONFIGURATION UPDATES

Automatic Configuration Update

When this feature is enabled, a reader and its linked Base Station can automatically
ensure they stay in sync with regard to application hardware and/or configuration. See
page 299 for more information on this feature.

$CBTCU00

Automatic Configuration Update = Disable

$CBTCU01

Automatic Configuration Update = Enable

Copy Configuration to Reader

Scan the following label to copy the current Base Station configuration to the reader.
Use this method when the Auto Configuration Update feature is disabled and you want
a one-time configuration update to be performed on the reader.

NOTE: Do not scan an ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE label in conjunc-

tion with this bar code.

Copy Configuration to Reader

Copy Configuration to Base Station

Scan the following label to copy the current reader configuration to the Base Station.
Use this method when the Auto Configuration Update feature is disabled and you want
a one-time configuration update to be performed on the Base Station.

NOTE: Do not scan an ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE label in conjunc-

tion with this bar code.

Copy Configuration to Base Station

262 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

BATCH FEATURES ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

BATCH FEATURES

Batch Mode
This option specifies whether to store labels in the handheld while disconnected from
the base. Options are as follows:
• Disabled — The handheld will not store/batch labels.
• Automatic — The handheld will store labels to RAM when the handheld goes out
of range and is disconnected from the remote device.
• Manual — The handheld will always store labels to Flash memory. The user must
manually send the stored labels to the remote device using a special "batch send"
label.

$CBTBM00

Batch Mode = Disable

$CBTBM01

Batch Mode = Automatic

$CBTBM02

Batch Mode = Manual

Send Batch
When the reader is configured in Manual Batch Mode, use the following bar code to ini-
tiate sending of labels stored in batch memory.

NOTE: Do not scan an ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE label in conjunc-

tion with this bar code.

Send Batch
BatchSend

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 263

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE WIRELESS FEATURES

Erase Batch Memory

When the reader is configured in Manual Batch Mode, use the following bar code to
erase any labels stored in batch memory.

NOTE: Do not scan an ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE label in conjunc-

tion with this bar code.

Erase Batch Memory

BatchClear

Send but not Erase Batch Memory

When the reader is configured in Manual Batch Mode, use the following bar code to
send any labels stored in batch memory.

NOTE: Do not scan an ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE label in conjunc-

tion with this bar code.

Send Batch Memory

BatchOnlySend

RF Batch Mode Transmit Delay

Specifies the delay in 10 msec increments between transmitting labels stored in batch
memory.

$CBTTD00

RF Batch Mode Transmit Delay = No Delay

$CBTTD05

RF Batch Mode Transmit Delay = 50 msec

$CBTTD0A

RF Batch Mode Transmit Delay =100 msec

264 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

DIRECT RADIO AUTOLINK ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

RF Batch Mode Transmit Delay (continued)

$CBTTD32

RF Batch Mode Transmit Delay = 0.5 seconds

$CBTTD64

RF Batch Mode Transmit Delay = 1 second

$CBTTDFA

RF Batch Mode Transmit Delay = 2.5 seconds

DIRECT RADIO AUTOLINK

Direct Radio Autolink

This feature enables/disables the ability to link a wireless handheld to a base station
without scanning the Unlink label first.

$CBTDL00

Direct Radio Link = Unlink Label Required

$CBTDL01

Direct Radio Link = Automatic Unlinking

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 265

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE WIRELESS FEATURES

RF ADDRESS STAMPING
These features allow configuration of source radio data inclusion.

Source Radio Address Transmission

Enables/disables the ability of source radio address information to be transmitted to the
host and, if so, at what position with respect to the label data. See page 299 in “Refer-
ences” for detailed information and examples for setting this feature.
NOTE: When included as a prefix, the source-radio ID is displayed after all
label formatting has been applied. The 6 byte hex address is sent as 12
ASCII characters, i.e., an address of 00 06 66 00 1A ED will be sent as
(shown in hex): 30 30 30 36 36 36 30 30 31 41 45 44

$CBTAS00
Source Radio Address Transmission =
Do Not Include

$CBTAS01

Source Radio Address Transmission = Prefix

Source Radio Address Delimiter Character

This option specifies the delimiter character to be placed between the label data and
radio address when address stamping is enabled.

NOTE: This feature only applies if "Source Radio Address Transmission" on

page 266 is enabled.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO-

GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar
code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanu-
meric characters in Appendix D, Keypad represent-
Set Source Radio Address Delimiter Character ing your desired character(s). End by scanning the
$CBTAD ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort

and not save the entry string. You can then start
again at the beginning.
CANCEL

Delimiter Character = 00 (no delimiter character)

266 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

FEATURES FOR STAR MODELS ONLY ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

FEATURES FOR STAR MODELS ONLY

The features in this section are valid only for the PowerScan PM96XX Star model:
• "STAR Radio Protocol Timeout" on page 267
• "STAR Radio Transmit Mode" on page 268

STAR Radio Protocol Timeout

This parameter sets the valid wait time before transmission between the handheld
reader and Base Station is considered failed.
When setting this parameter, take into consideration the radio traffic (number of read-
ers in the same area). The selectable range for this feature is from 02 to 25 seconds. See
page 300 in “References” for detailed information and examples for setting this feature.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO-

GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar
code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanu-
meric characters in Appendix D, Keypad represent-
Set Radio Protocol Timeout ing your desired character(s). End by scanning the
$CSTPT ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort

and not save the entry string. You can then start
again at the beginning.
CANCEL

Radio Protocol Timeout = 02 (2 seconds)

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 267

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE WIRELESS FEATURES

STAR Radio Transmit Mode

Specifies the transmission protocol for Star communications.
Options are:
• ACK from base station to reader — signals a good transmission as soon as the Base
Station receives a label
• ACK when sent to host — reader signals a good transmission as soon as the Base
Station has sent the label to the host
• ACK from host — reader signals a good transmission as soon as the Base Station
has sent the label to the host and host has replied with an acknowledge message.

$CSTTX00
STAR Radio Transmit Mode =
ACK from Base Station

$CSTTX01

STAR Radio Transmit Mode = ACK When Sent to Host

$CSTTX02

STAR Radio Transmit Mode = ACK from Host

NOTE: ACK from host works only for RS-232 or USB-COM interfaces with
ACK/NACK disabled. If ACK from host is configured with any other interface
conditions, it works like ACK when sent to host.
See "Message Formatting" on page 303 for details.

NOTE: The Base Station can receive a host message only if Host Commands
Obey/Ignore (page 36) is set to Ignore.

268 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

FEATURES FOR STAR MODELS ONLY ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

STAR System Speed

By default, the Reader and the Base exchange data at high speed over the wireless com-
munication channel. Reducing the speed from high to low, the radio range can be fur-
ther extended. Moreover, when using low speed, the Reader can be configured to use
the STAR Frequency Agility feature (see "STAR Frequency Agility" on page 270) also for
the 433 MHz model (see Table 7 on page 271).

To change the STAR System Speed, follow this procedure:

1. link the Reader to the Base;

2. scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code above; read either the
“High speed” or “Low speed” programming label below to set the desired speed;
end by scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

3. place the Reader into the Base.

The Reader and the Base will now be linked at the new programmed speed.

This feature can also be programmed using the Datalogic Aladdin tool:

1. set the STAR System Speed to “High speed” or “Low speed” through Aladdin;

2. place an unlinked Reader into the Base.

The Reader and the Base will link at the new programmed speed.

NOTE: PowerScan 433 MHz Star models do not support all combinations of
STAR System Speed and STAR Frequency Agility (see "STAR Frequency
Agility" on page 270) configuration parameters. Please refer to Table 7 on
page 271 for the allowed combinations.

$CSTCP03

STAR System Speed = High Speed

$CSTCP01

STAR System Speed = Low Speed

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 269

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE WIRELESS FEATURES

STAR Frequency Agility

In exceptionally noisy environments or in case of a high concentration of radio devices,
the STAR system performance may be improved by enabling the STAR Frequency Agility
feature. This feature changes the way the radio frequencies are used in a STAR commu-
nication system.

As in the case of the STAR System Speed, use the following procedure:

1. link the Reader to the Base;

2. scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code above; read either the
“Enable” or “Disable” programming label below to Enable or Disable the feature;
end by scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

3. place the Reader into the Base.

The Reader and the Base will be linked and the new frequency handling strategy will be
operational.
NOTE: It is possible to configure the STAR system to use a fixed channel
with different frequency from the default one. Please contact Datalogic
Technical Support for information about this feature. Please refer to
Table 7 on page 271 for valid combinations of this feature with the STAR
System Speed configuration parameter.

NOTE: PowerScan 433 MHz Star models do not support all combinations of
STAR Frequency Agility and STAR System Speed (see "STAR System Speed"
on page 269) configuration parameters. Please refer to Table 7 on page 271
for the allowed combinations.

$CSTFA00
STAR Frequency Agility = Disable
(use default fixed channel)

$CSTFA80

STAR Frequency Agility = Enable

270 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

Table 7 Supported combinations of STAR System Speed and STAR
Frequency Agility configuration parameters

FIXED CHANNEL
SYSTEM FREQUENCY
DIFFERENT FROM
SPEED AGILITY
DEFAULT
433 MHz Model
Low Speed Yes Yes
High Speed No No
910 MHz Model
Low Speed Yes Yes
High Speed Yes Yes

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 271

CHAPTER 4
REFERENCES
This section contains explanations and examples of selected bar code features. See Con-
figuration with Bar Codes, starting on page 34 for the actual bar code labels used to con-
figure the reader.

SECTION CONTENTS
RS-232 PARAMETERS on page 273
• Baud Rate • Parity
• Data Bits • Handshaking Control
• Stop Bits
RS-232/USB COM PARAMETERS on page 274
• Intercharacter Delay • ACK NAK Timeout Value
• ACK NAK Options • ACK NAK Retry Count
• ACK Character • Disable Character
• NAK Character • Enable Character
KEYBOARD INTERFACE on page 281
• Wedge Quiet Interval • Intercode Delay
• Intercharacter Delay
DATA FORMAT on page 284
• Data Editing • Label ID
• Global Prefix/Suffix • Character Conversion
• Global AIM ID
SCANNING FEATURES on page 292
• Scan Mode • Flash On Time
• Scanning Active Time • Flash Off Time
• Aiming Duration Time
LED AND BEEPER INDICATORS on page 298
• Good Read LED Duration

RF FEATURES on page 299

• Automatic Configuration Update • STAR Radio Protocol Timeout
• RF Address Stamping
SYMBOLOGIES on page 301
• Set Length

272 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

 RS-232 PARAMETERS

RS-232 PARAMETERS

RS-232 ONLY

Baud Rate
Baud rate is the number of bits of data transmitted per second. Set the reader's baud
rate to match the baud rate setting of the host device. With an improper baud rate set-
ting, data may not reach the host correctly.

Data Bits
This parameter allows the reader to interface with devices requiring a 7-bit or 8-bit
ASCII protocol for sending and receiving data.

Stop Bits
The stop bit(s) at the end of each transmitted character marks the end of transmission
of one character and prepares the receiving device for the next character in the serial
data stream. The number of stop bits selected (one or two) depends on the number the
receiving terminal is programmed to accommodate. Set the number of stop bits to
match host device requirements.

Parity
This feature specifies parity required for sending and receiving data. A parity check bit is
the most significant bit of each ASCII coded character. Select the parity type according
to host device requirements.
• Select None when no parity bit is required.
• Select Odd parity and the parity bit value is set to 0 or 1, based on data, to ensure
that an odd number of 1 bits are contained in the coded character.
• Select Even parity and the parity bit value is set to 0 or 1, based on data, to ensure
that an even number of 1 bits are contained in the coded character.

Handshaking Control
The data interface consists of an RS-232 port designed to operate either with or without
the hardware handshaking lines, Request to Send (RTS), and Clear to Send (CTS). Hand-
shaking Control includes the following options:
• RTS — RTS is asserted during transmissions. CTS is ignored.
• RTS/CTS — RTS is asserted during transmissions. CTS gates transmissions.
• RTS/XON/XOFF — RTS is asserted during transmissions. CTS is ignored. XON and
XOFF gate transmissions.
• RTS On/CTS — RTS is always asserted. CTS gates transmissions.
• RTS/CTS Scan Control — RTS is asserted during transmissions. CTS gates transmis-
sions and controls enable and disable state of reader.

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 273

REFERENCES

RS-232/USB COM PARAMETERS

Intercharacter Delay
This parameter specifies the intercharacter delay between the end of one character and
the beginning of the next. The delay can be set within a range of zero (0) to 990 millisec-
onds in 10ms increments. A setting of zero specifies no delay.
To set the delay:

1. Determine the desired setting in milliseconds.

2. Divide the desired setting by 10 (setting is in 10ms increments). Pad the result
with leading zeroes to yield two digits. For example: 0 = 00, 5 = 05, 20 = 20, etc.

3. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to enter Programming

Mode.

4. Go to page 43 and scan the bar code: SELECT INTERCHARACTER DELAY SETTING.

5. Scan the appropriate two digits from the keypad in Appendix D, that represent the
duration which was determined in the steps above. You will hear a two-beep indi-
cation after the last character.

NOTE: If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL
bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at
the beginning.

6. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to exit.

This completes the procedure. See the following table for examples of how to set this
feature.

Table 8 - Intercharacter Delay Setting Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES

1 Desired Setting 50ms 150ms 600ms 850ms

Divide by 10 (pad with leading

2 05 10 60 85
zeroes to yield two-digits)

3 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

4 Scan SELECT INTERCHARACTER DELAY SETTING

Scan two characters from

5 ‘0’ and ‘5’ ‘1’ and 5’ ‘6’ and ‘0’ 8’ and ‘5’
Appendix D

6 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

274 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

 RS-232/USB COM PARAMETERS

ACK NAK Options

This enables/disables the ability of the reader to support the RS-232 ACK/NAK protocol.
When configured, the reader and/or host sends an “ACK” when it receives data prop-
erly, and sends “NAK” when the data is in error.
Options are:
• Disable
• Enable for label transmission — The reader expects an ACK/NAK response from
the host when a label is sent
• Enable for host-command acknowledge — The reader will respond with ACK/NAK
when the host sends a command
• Enable for label transmission and host-command acknowledge

ACK Character
This setting specifies an ASCII character or hex value to be used as the ACK character.
ASCII characters or any hex value from 0 to 0xFF can be selected.
NOTE: Setting to previously defined characters such as XON, XOFF, or host
commands conflicts with normal operation of these characters. 8-bit data
is not recognized when the option Data Bits page 46 has been set as 7 Data
Bits.

1. Determine the desired character or value.

2. Use the ASCII Chart on page 345 to find the hex equivalent for the desired charac-
ter/value.

3. Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE to enter Programming Mode.

4. Scan the bar code: SELECT ACK CHARACTER SETTING.

5. Scan the appropriate two alphanumeric characters from the keypad in Appendix D,
that represent the desired character/value determined above. The second charac-
ter will cause a two-beep indication.

6. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to exit.

See the table below for examples of how to set this feature.

Table 9 - ACK Character Setting Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES

1 Desired Character/Value ACK $ @ >
Hex equivalent from ASCII Chart
2 0x06 0x24 0x40 0x3E
on page 345
3 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
4 Scan SELECT ACK CHARACTER SETTING
Scan two characters from
5 ‘0’ and ‘6’ ‘2’ and ‘4’ ‘4’ and ‘0’ ‘3’ AND ‘E’
Appendix D
6 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 275

REFERENCES

NAK Character
This setting specifies an ASCII character or hex value to be used as the NAK character.
ASCII characters or any hex value from 0 to 0xFF can be selected.
NOTE: Setting to previously defined characters such as XON, XOFF, or host
commands conflicts with normal operation of these characters. 8-bit data
is not recognized when the option Data Bits on page 46 has been set as 7
Data Bits.

To set this feature:

1. Determine the desired character or value.

2. Use the ASCII Chart on page 345 to find the hex equivalent for the desired charac-
ter/value.

3. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to enter Programming

Mode.

4. Scan the bar code: SELECT NAK CHARACTER SETTING.

5. Scan the appropriate two alpha-numeric characters from the keypad in

Appendix D, that represent the desired character/value determined above. The
second character will cause a two-beep indication.

6. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to exit Programming Mode.
This completes the procedure. See the table below for examples of how to set this fea-
ture.

Table 10 - NAK Character Setting Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES

1 Desired Character/Value NAK $ @ >
2 Hex equivalent 0x15 0x24 0x40 0x3E
3 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
4 Scan SELECT NAK CHARACTER SETTING
Scan two characters from
5 ‘1’ and ‘5’ ‘2’ and ‘4’ ‘4’ and ‘0’ ‘3’ AND ‘E’
Appendix D
6 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

276 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

 RS-232/USB COM PARAMETERS

ACK NAK Timeout Value

This option specifies the amount of time the reader waits for an ACK character from the
host following label transmission. The selectable timeout range is 200 milliseconds to
15,000ms (15 seconds) in 200ms increments. A selection of 0 disables the timeout.
To set this value:

1. Determine the desired setting in milliseconds.

2. Divide the desired setting by 200 (setting is in 200ms increments). Pad the result
with leading zeroes to yield two digits. For example: 0 = 00, 5 = 05, 20 = 20, etc.

3. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to enter Programming

Mode.

4. Scan the bar code: SELECT ACK NAK TIMEOUT VALUE SETTING.

5. Scan the appropriate two digits from the keypad in Appendix D, that represent the
duration which was determined in the steps above. You will hear a two-beep indi-
cation after the last character.

NOTE: If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL
bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at
the beginning.

6. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to exit Programming Mode.
This completes the procedure. See the table below for examples of how to set this fea-
ture.

Table 11 - ACK NAK Timeout Value Setting Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES

1 Desired Setting 200ms 1,000ms (1 sec.) 5200ms (5.2 sec.) 15,000ms (15 sec.)

2 Divide by 200 01 05 26 75
3 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
4 Scan SELECT ACK NAK TIMEOUT VALUE SETTING
Scan two characters from
5 ‘0’ and ‘1’ ‘0’ and ‘5’ ‘2’ and ‘6’ ‘7’ AND ‘5’
Appendix D
6 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 277

REFERENCES

ACK NAK Retry Count

This feature specifies the number of times the reader retries a label transmission due to
a retry condition. The selectable range is from 1 to 254 retries. A selection of 0 disables
the count, and a selection of 255 specifies unlimited retries.
To set this feature:

1. Determine the desired setting.

2. Pad the number with leading zeroes to yield three digits. For example: 0 = 000, 5 =
005, 20 = 020, etc.

3. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to enter Programming

Mode.

4. Scan the bar code: SELECT ACK NAK RETRY COUNT SETTING.

5. Scan the appropriate three digits from the keypad in Appendix D, that represent
the number which was determined in the steps above. You will hear a two-beep
indication after the last character.

NOTE: If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL
bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at
the beginning.

6. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to exit Programming Mode.
This completes the procedure. See the table below for examples of how to set this fea-
ture.

Table 12 - ACK NAK Retry Count Setting Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES

Disable Retry Unlimited
1 Desired Setting 3 Retries 54 Retries
Count Retries
2 Pad with leading zero(es) 000 003 054 255
3 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
4 Scan SELECT ACK NAK RETRY COUNT SETTING
Scan three characters
5 ‘0’, ‘0’ and ‘0’ ‘0’, ‘0’ and ‘3’ ‘0’, ‘5’ and ‘4’ ‘2’, ‘5’ and ‘5’
from Appendix D
6 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

278 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

 RS-232/USB COM PARAMETERS

Disable Character
Specifies the value of the RS-232 host command used to disable the reader.
ASCII characters or any hex value from 0 to 0xFF can be selected.
NOTE: Setting to previously defined characters such as XON, XOFF, or host
commands conflicts with normal operation of these characters. 8-bit data
is not recognized when the option "Data Bits" on page 39 has been set as 7
Data Bits.

To set the value:

1. Determine the desired character or value. A setting of 0xFF indicates the Disable
Character is not used (not available).

2. Use the ASCII Chart on page 345 to find the hex equivalent for the desired charac-
ter/value.

3. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to enter Programming

Mode.

4. Scan the bar code: SELECT DISABLE CHARACTER SETTING on page 49.

5. Scan the appropriate two alphanumeric characters from the keypad in Appendix D,
that represent the desired character/value determined above. The second charac-
ter will cause a two-beep indication.

6. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to exit Programming Mode.
This completes the procedure. See the table below for examples of how to set this fea-
ture.

Table 13 -Disable Character Setting Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES

Disable Com-
1 Desired character/value ‘d’ ‘}’ ‘D’ mand
Not Used
Hex equivalent from ASCII Chart
2 0x64 0x7D 0x44 0xFF
on page 345
3 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
4 Scan SELECT DISABLE CHARACTER VALUE SETTING
Scan three characters from
5 ‘6’ and ‘4’ ‘7’ and ‘D’ ‘4’ and ‘4’ ‘F’ and ‘F’
Appendix D
6 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 279

REFERENCES

Enable Character
Specifies the value of the RS-232 host command used to enable the reader.
ASCII characters or any hex value from 0 to 0xFF can be selected.
NOTE: Setting to previously defined characters such as XON, XOFF, or host
commands conflicts with normal operation of these characters. 8-bit data
is not recognized when the option "Data Bits" on page 39 has been set as 7
Data Bits.

To set the value:

1. Determine the desired character or value. A setting of 0xFF indicates the Enable
Character is not used (not available).

2. Use the ASCII Chart in Appendix F to find the hex equivalent for the desired charac-
ter/value.

3. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to enter Programming

Mode.

4. Scan the bar code: SELECT ENABLE CHARACTER SETTING on page 49.

5. Scan the appropriate two alphanumeric characters from the keypad in Appendix D,
that represent the desired character/value determined above. The second charac-
ter will cause a two-beep indication.

6. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to exit Programming Mode.
This completes the procedure. See the table below for examples of how to set this fea-
ture.

Table 14 - Enable Character Setting Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES

Enable Command
1 Desired character/value ‘e’ ‘}’ ‘E’
Not Used
Hex equivalent from ASCII Chart
2 0x65 0x7D 0x45 0xFF
on page 345
3 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
4 Scan SELECT ENABLE CHARACTER VALUE SETTING
Scan two characters from
5 ‘6’ and ‘5’ ‘7’ and ‘D’ ‘4’ and ‘5’ ‘F’ and ‘F’
Appendix D
6 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

280 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

 KEYBOARD INTERFACE

KEYBOARD INTERFACE

Wedge Quiet Interval

Specifies the amount of time the reader looks for keyboard activity before it breaks the
keyboard connection in order to transmit data to host. The range is from 0 to 990ms in
10ms increments.

NOTE: This feature applies ONLY to the Keyboard Wedge interface.

1. Determine the desired setting in milliseconds.

2. Divide the desired setting by 10 (setting is in 10ms increments). Pad the result
with leading zeroes to yield two digits. For example: 0 = 00, 5 = 05, 20 = 20, etc.

3. Go to page 76 and scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to enter
Prog. Mode.

4. Scan the bar code: SELECT WEDGE QUIET INTERVAL SETTING on page 76.

5. Scan the appropriate two digits from the keypad in Appendix D, that represent the
duration which was determined in the steps above. You will hear a two-beep indi-
cation after the last character.

NOTE: If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL
bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at
the beginning.

6. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to exit.

This completes the procedure to set the Wedge Quiet Interval. See the table below for
examples of how to set this feature.

Table 15 - Wedge Quiet Interval Setting Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES

1 Desired Setting 10ms 150ms 600ms 850ms
Divide by 10 (and pad with
2 01 15 60 85
leading zeroes
3 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
4 Scan SELECT WEDGE QUIET INTERVAL SETTING
Scan two characters from
5 ‘0’ and ‘1’ ‘1’ and ‘5’ ‘6’ and ‘0’ ‘8’ and ‘5’
Appendix D
6 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 281

REFERENCES

Intercharacter Delay
This parameter specifies the intercharacter delay between the end of one character and
the beginning of the next. The delay can be set within a range of zero (0) to 990 millisec-
onds in 10ms increments. A setting of zero specifies no delay.

NOTE: This feature applies ONLY to the Keyboard Wedge interface.

To set the delay:

1. Determine the desired setting in milliseconds.

2. Divide the desired setting by 10 (setting is in 10ms increments). Pad the result
with leading zeroes to yield two digits. For example: 0 = 00, 5 = 05, 20 = 20, etc.

3. Go to page 76 and scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to enter
Programming Mode.

4. Scan the bar code: SELECT INTERCHARACTER DELAY SETTING on page 76.

5. Scan the appropriate two digits from the keypad in Appendix D, that represent the
duration which was determined in the steps above. You will hear a two-beep indi-
cation after the last character.

NOTE: If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL
bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at
the beginning.

6. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to exit Programming Mode.
This completes the procedure. See the table below for examples of how to set this fea-
ture.

Table 16 - Intercharacter Delay Setting Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES

1 Desired Setting 50ms 150ms 600ms 850ms
Divide by 10 (and pad with lead-
2 05 15 60 85
ing zeroes to yield two-digits)
3 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
4 Scan SELECT INTERCHARACTER DELAY SETTING
Scan two characters from
5 ‘0’ and ‘5’ ‘1’ and ‘5’ ‘6’ and ‘0’ ‘8’ and ‘5’
Appendix D
6 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

282 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

 KEYBOARD INTERFACE

Intercode Delay
Specifies the delay between labels transmitted to the host for this interface. The select-
able range for this feature is from 0 to 99 seconds.
Follow these instructions to set this feature:

1. Determine the desired setting.

2. Pad the number with leading zeroes to yield two digits. For example: 0 = 00, 5 =
05, 20 = 20, etc

3. Go to page 77 and scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to enter
Programming Mode.

4. Scan the bar code: SELECT INTERCODE DELAY SETTING on page 77.

5. Scan the appropriate two digits from the keypad in Appendix D, that represent the
duration which was determined in the steps above. You will hear a two-beep indi-
cation after the last character.

NOTE: If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL
bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at
the beginning.

6. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to exit Programming Mode.
This completes the procedure. See the table below for examples of how to set this fea-
ture.

Table 17 - Intercode Delay Setting Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES

1 Desired Setting No Delay 5 seconds 60 seconds 99 seconds
2 Pad with leading zero(es) 00 05 60 99
3 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
4 Scan SELECT INTERCODE DELAY SETTING
Scan two characters from
5 ‘0’ and ‘0’ ‘0’ and ‘5’ ‘6’ and ‘0’ ‘9’ and ‘9’
Appendix D
6 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 283

REFERENCES

DATA FORMAT

Data Editing
When a bar code is scanned, additional information can be sent to the host computer
along with the bar code data. This combination of bar code data and supplementary
user-defined data is called a “message string.” The Data Editing features can be used to
build specific user-defined data into a message string.
There are several types of selectable data characters that can be sent before and after
scanned data. You can specify if they should be sent with all symbologies, or only with
specific symbologies. The following shows the available elements you can add to a mes-
sage string:
Figure 10 - Breakdown of a Message String

Label ID Transmission:
Enable this option to
transmit the Label ID you
configure for the scanned
symbology.
OR...

Prefix Label ID AIM ID Bar Code Data Label ID Suffix

AIM ID: This function is used to identify and display the

common label identifier for its symbology. When enabled, this
ID code will be transmitted before the scanned bar code data.

00 - 20 Characters (ASCII)

NOTE: Additional advanced editing is available. See the Advanced format-

ting features in the Datalogic Aladdin configuration software, or contact
"Technical Support" on page xiv for more information.

Please Keep In Mind...

• Modifying a message string is not a mandatory requirement. Data editing is a
sophisticated feature allowing highly customizable output for advanced users. Fac-
tory default settings for data editing is typically set to NONE.
• A prefix or suffix may be applied only to a specified symbology (reference 1D
Symbologies, starting on page 111) or across all symbologies (set via the Global fea-
tures in Configuration with Bar Codes, starting on page 34).
• You can add any character from the ASCII Chart on page 345 (from 00-FF) on the
inside back cover of this manual as a prefix, suffix or Label ID.
• Enter prefixes and suffixes in the order in which you want them to appear on the
output.

284 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

 DATA FORMAT

Global Prefix/Suffix
Up to 20 ASCII characters may be added as a prefix (in a position before the bar code
data) and/or as a suffix (in a position following the bar code data) as indicated.
Figure 11 Prefix and Suffix Positions

OR...

Prefix Label ID AIM ID Bar Code Data Label ID Suffix

00 - 20 Characters (ASCII)
AND
OR

Example: Setting a Prefix

In this example, we’ll set a prefix for all symbologies.

1. Determine which ASCII character(s) are to be added to scanned bar code data. In
this example, we’ll add a dollar sign (‘$’) as a prefix.

2. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code, then scan the SET GLOBAL
PREFIX bar code.

3. Reference the ASCII Chart on page 345 in Appendix F to find the hex value assigned
to the desired character. The corresponding hex number for the ‘$’ character is 24.
To enter this selection code, scan the ‘2’ and ‘4’ bar codes from Appendix D.

NOTE: If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL
bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at
the beginning.

4. If less than the expected string of 20 characters are selected, scan the ENTER/EXIT
bar code to terminate the string.

5. Scan the ENTER/EXIT bar code once again to exit Programming Mode.
The resulting message string would appear as follows:
Scanned bar code data: 12345
Resulting message string output: $12345

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 285

REFERENCES

Global AIM ID
NOTE: This feature enables/disables addition of AIM IDs for all symbology
types.

AIM label identifiers (as opposed to custom characters you select yourself as with label
identifiers) can be included with scanned bar code data. AIM label identifiers consist of
three characters as follows:
• A close brace character (ASCII ‘]’), followed by...
• A code character (see the table below), followed by...
• A modifier character (the modifier character is symbol dependent).

SYMBOLOGY CHAR SYMBOLOGY CHAR

UPC/EAN Ea Code 128/GS1-128 C

DataBar Omnidirectional,
Code 39 and Code 32 A e
DataBar Expanded

Codabar F Standard 2 of 5 S

Interleaved 2 of 5 I ISBN Xb

Code 93 G Code 11 H

a. UPC-A and UPC-E labels are converted to EAN 13 when adding AIM IDs.
b. ISBN (X with a 0 modifier character)

Figure 12 AIM ID

Prefix Label ID AIM ID Bar Code Data Label ID Suffix

286 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

 DATA FORMAT

Label ID
A Label ID is a customizable code of up to three ASCII characters (each can be one of hex
0x01-0xFF), used to identify a bar code (symbology) type. It can be appended previous
to or following the transmitted bar code data depending upon how this option is
enabled. This feature provides options for configuring custom Label IDs as a pre-loaded
set or individually per symbology (see "Label ID: Set Individually Per Symbology" on page
86). If you wish to program the reader to always include an industry standard label iden-
tifier for ALL symbology types, see "Global AIM ID" on page 84.

Label ID: Pre-loaded Sets

The following table lists the pre-loaded label ID sets for the USA and Europe.

Table 18 - Label ID Pre-loaded Sets

SYMBOLOGY USA LABEL ID SET EU LABEL ID SET

ASCII Hex ASCII Hexadecimal
character value character value
ABC Codabar S 530000 S 530000
CODABAR % 250000 R 520000
Code 39 CIP HR Y 590000 Y 590000
Code 93 & 260000 U 550000
Code 11 CE 434500 b 620000
Code 128 # 230000 T 540000
Code 32 A 410000 X 580000
Code 39 * 2A0000 V 560000
Datalogic 2of5 s 730000 s 730000
EAN13 F 460000 B 420000
EAN13 P2 F 460000 L 4C0000
EAN13 P5 F 460000 M 4D0000
EAN8 FF 464600 A 410000
EAN8 P2 FF 464600 J 4A0000
EAN8 P5 FF 464600 K 4B0000
FOLLETT 2OF5 O 4F0000 O 4F0000
GS1 DATABAR EXPANDED RX 525800 t 740000
GS1 DATABAR LIMITED RL 524C00 v 760000
GS1 DATABAR OMNIDIRECTIONAL R4 523400 u 750000
GS1-128 000000 k 6B0000
I2OF5 i 690000 N 4E0000
IATA IA 494100 & 260000
Industrial 2 of 5 W 570000 W 570000
Interleaved 2 of 5 e 650000 e 650000
ISBN l 490000 @ 400000
ISBT128 f 660000 f 660000

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 287

REFERENCES

SYMBOLOGY USA LABEL ID SET EU LABEL ID SET

ISSN n 6E0000 n 6E0000
MSI @ 400000 Z 5A0000
S25 s 730000 P 500000
UPCA A 410000 C 430000
UPCA P2 A 410000 F 460000
UPCA P5 A 410000 G 470000
UPCE E 450000 D 440000
UPCE P2 E 450000 H 480000
UPCE P5 E 450000 I 490000
OCR-A o 6F0000 $o 246F00
OCR-B o 6F0000 $p 247000
MICR o 6F0000 $m 246D00

288 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

 DATA FORMAT

Label ID: Set Individually Per Symbology

To configure a Label ID individually for a single symbology:

1. Scan the ENTER/EXIT bar code.

2. Select Label ID position as either BEFORE (Enable as Prefix) or AFTER (Enable as

suffix) by scanning the appropriate bar code in the section "Label ID Control" on
page 86. Reference Figure 13 for Label ID positioning options if multiple identifica-
tion features are enabled.

3. Scan a bar code to select the symbology for which you wish to configure a custom
Label ID from the section "Label ID Symbology Selection" on page 87.

4. Determine the desired character(s) (you may choose up to three) which will repre-
sent the Label ID for the selected symbology.

5. Turn to the ASCII Chart on page 345 on the inside back cover of this manual and
find the equivalent hex digits associated with your choice of Label ID. For example,
if you wish to select an equal sign (=) as a Label ID, the chart indicates its associ-
ated hex characters as 3D. Turn to Keypad, in Appendix D, and scan the bar codes
representing the hex characters determined. For the example given, the charac-
ters ‘3’ and ‘D’ would be scanned. More examples of Label ID settings are provided
in Table 19 on page 290.

NOTE: If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL
bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at
the beginning.

6. Scan the ENTER/EXIT bar code to exit Label ID entry.

7. Scan the ENTER/EXIT bar code once again to exit Programming Mode.
This completes the steps to configure a Label ID for a given symbology.
Figure 13 Label ID Position Options

Prefix Label ID Aim ID Bar Code Data Label ID Suffix

OR

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 289

REFERENCES

Label ID: Set Individually Per Symbology — continued

Table 19 Label ID Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES

1 Scan the ENTER/EXIT bar code (Reader enters Programming Mode)

Determine placement of the

Label ID characters BEFORE
2 or AFTER with regard to Enable as Prefix Enable as Suffix Enable as Prefix Enable as Suffix
scanned data using Label ID
Control, starting on page 86

Scan the bar code selecting

the symbology type you wish
to designate label ID charac- GS1 DataBar
3 Code 39 Interleaved 2 of 5 Code 32
ters for using Label ID Sym- Omnidirectional
bology Selection, starting on
page 87

Custom Label ID example

4 DB* =C3 + PH
(desired characters):

Find hex equivalents from the

ASCII table (inside back cover),
then scan in these digits/char-
acters using the bar codes in
the section: Keypad, starting
5 on page 338. f you make a 44 42 2A 3D 43 33 2B 50 48
mistake before the last char-
acter, scan the CANCEL bar
code to abort and not save the
entry string. You can then start
again at the beginning.

6 Scan the ENTER/EXIT bar code (Reader exits Label ID entry)

Scan the ENTER/EXIT bar code

7 (Reader exits Programming Mode)
once again

Result: DB*[bar code data] [bar code data]=C3 +[bar code data] [bar code data]PH

290 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

 DATA FORMAT

Character Conversion
Character conversion is an eight byte configuration item. The eight bytes are 4 character
pairs represented in hexadecimal ASCII values. The first character in the pair is the char-
acter that will be converted. The second character in the pair is the character to convert
to. If the character to convert in a pair is FF, then no conversion is done.
For example, if you have the character conversion configuration item set to the follow-
ing: 41423132FFFFFFFF
The first pair is 4142 or AB (41 hex is an ASCII capital A, 42 hex is an ASCII capital B) and
the second pair is 3132 or 12 (31 hex is an ASCII 1, 32 is an ASCII 2). The other two pairs
are FFFF and FFFF.
With the label, AB12BA21, it would look as follows after the character
conversion: BB22BB22.
The A characters were converted to B characters and the 1 characters were converted to
2 characters. Nothing is done with the last two character pairs, since they are all FF.

To set Character Conversion:

1. Scan the ENTER/EXIT bar code.

2. Scan the bar code for "Character Conversion" on page 83

3. Determine the desired string. Sixteen positions must be determined as in the

above example. Next, turn to the ASCII Chart on page 345 on the inside back cover
of this manual and find the equivalent hex digits needed to fulfill the string.

4. Turn to Appendix D, Keypad and scan the bar codes representing the hex charac-
ters determined in the previous step.

5. Scan the ENTER/EXIT bar code to exit Programming Mode.

NOTE: If less than the expected string of 16 characters are selected, scan
the ENTER/EXIT bar code twice to accept the selections and exit Program-
ming Mode.

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 291

REFERENCES

SCANNING FEATURES

Scan Mode
Selects the scan operating mode for the reader. Selections are:

Trigger Single: When the trigger is pulled, scanning is activated until one of the follow-
ing occurs:
• Stand Mode/Object Detection has elapsed
• a label has been read
• the trigger is released
This mode is associated with typical handheld reader operation: when the trigger is
pulled, scanning starts and the product scans until the trigger is released, or a label is
read, or the maximum Stand Mode/Object Detection has elapsed.

Trigger Hold Multiple: When the trigger is pulled, scanning starts and the product
scans until the trigger is released or Stand Mode/Object Detection has elapsed. Reading
a label does not disable scanning. Double Read Timeout prevents undesired multiple
reads of the same label while in this mode.

Trigger Pulse Multiple: When the trigger is pulled, continuous scanning is activated
until Stand Mode/Object Detection has elapsed or the trigger has been released and
pulled again. Double Read Timeout prevents undesired multiple reads of the same label
while in this mode.

Flashing: The reader flashes1 on and off regardless of the trigger status. Flash rate is
controlled by Flash On Time and Flash Off Time. When Flash is ON the reader reads con-
tinuously. When Flash is OFF scanning is deactivated.

Always On: No trigger pull is required to read a bar code. Scanning is continually on.
Double Read Timeout prevents undesired multiple reads of the same label while in this
mode.

Stand Mode/Object Detection: No trigger pull is required to read a bar code. Scanning
turns on automatically when an item is placed in reader's field of view. While in a stand
watch state, the reader illumination LED goes from dim to maximum bright.

Retained Trigger Hold Multiple: Same as Trigger Hold Multiple but all decoded labels
are transmitted when the trigger is released. The labels can be sorted before transmis-
sion. When the reader is configured in Retained Trigger Hold Multiple, it is possible to
set the parameter Multiple Labels Ordering by Code Symbology to specify the order multi-
ple labels are transmitted by symbology type.
To configure the code symbology order, choose the corresponding digits from the fol-
lowing table:
Table 20 - Multiple Labels Ordering by Code Symbology
HEX VALUE CODE SYMBOLOGY HEX VALUE CODE SYMBOLOGY
0x00 = Any Type 0x20 = ISBN
0x01 = UPC-A 0x22 = Interleaved 2/5
0x02 = UPC-E 0x23 = Codabar

1. Controlled by Flash On Time.

292 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

 SCANNING FEATURES

HEX VALUE CODE SYMBOLOGY HEX VALUE CODE SYMBOLOGY

0x03 = EAN-8 0x24 = Code 39
0x04 = EAN-13 0x25 = Code 32
0x0A = GS1-128 0x26 = MSI-Plessey
0x0C = Code 128 0x27 = Code 93
0x0D = Maxicode 0x28 = GS1 DataBar Expanded
0x0E = Datamatrix 0x29 = GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional
0x10 = QR 0x2A = GTIN
0x14 = UPC-E with P2 Addon 0x2B = GTIN with P2 Addon
0x15 = UPC-E with P5 Addon 0x2C = GTIN with P5 Addon
0x17 = UPC-A with P2 Addon 0x2E = Standard 2/5
0x18 = UPC-A with P5 Addon 0x2F = PDF 417
0x1A = EAN-8 with P2 Addon 0x30 = Code 11
0x1B = EAN-8 with P5 Addon 0x31 = IATA
0x1D = EAN-13 with P2 Addon 0x32 = Micro PDF
0x1E = EAN-13 with P5 Addon 0x33 = GS1 DataBar Limited
HEX VALUE CODE SYMBOLOGY HEX VALUE CODE SYMBOLOGY
0x34 = GS1 DataBar Limited Composite 0x49 = ABC Codabar
0x35 = GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional Composite 0x4A = Interleaved 2/5 CIP/HR
0x36 = GS1 DataBar Expanded Composite 0x4C = Industrial 2/5
0x3D = Code 16K 0x4D = Aztec
0x40 = Anker Plessey 0x4E = UPC-E Composite
0x41 = ISSN 0x4F = UPC-A Composite
0x42 = ISBT 128 0x50 = EAN-8 Composite
0x45 = Follet 2/5 0x51 = EAN-13 Composite
0x48 = Code 39/CIP 0x52 = GS1-128 Composite

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 293

REFERENCES

Scanning Active Time

This setting specifies the amount of time that the reader stays in scan ON state once the
state is entered. The range for this setting is from 1 to 255 seconds in 1-second incre-
ments.
Follow these instructions to set this feature:

1. Determine the desired setting.

2. Pad the result with leading zeroes to yield three digits. For example: 0 = 000, 5 =
005, 20 = 020, etc.

3. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to enter Programming

Mode.

4. Scan the bar code: SELECT SCANNING ACTIVE TIME SETTING on page 94.

5. Scan the appropriate three digits from the keypad in Appendix D, that represent
the duration which was determined in the steps above. You will hear a two-beep
indication after the last character.

NOTE: If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL
bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at
the beginning.

6. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to exit Programming Mode.
This completes the procedure. See the table below for examples of how to set this fea-
ture.

Table 21 Scanning Active Time Setting Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES

90 Sec. 180 Sec. 255 Seconds
1 Desired Setting 1 Second
(1.5 min.) (3 min.) (4.25 min.)

2 Pad leading zero(es) 001 090 180 255

3 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
4 Scan SELECT SCANNING ACTIVE TIME SETTING
Scan three characters from
5 ‘0’, ‘0’ and ‘1’ ‘0’, ‘9’ and ‘0’ ‘1’, ‘8’ and ‘0’ ‘2’, ‘5’ and ‘5’
Appendix D
6 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

294 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

 SCANNING FEATURES

Aiming Duration Time

Specifies the frame of time the aiming pointer remains on after decoding a label, when
in trigger single mode. The range for this setting is from 1 to 255 seconds in 1-second
increments.
Follow these instructions to set this feature:

1. Determine the desired setting.

2. Pad the result with leading zeroes to yield three digits. For example: 0 = 000, 5 =
005, 20 = 020, etc.

3. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to enter Programming

Mode.

4. Scan the bar code: SELECT AIMING DURATION TIME SETTING.

5. Scan the appropriate two digits from the keypad in Appendix D, that represent the
duration which was determined in the steps above. You will hear a two-beep indi-
cation after the last character.

NOTE: If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL
bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at
the beginning.

6. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to exit Programming Mode.
This completes the procedure. See the following table for some examples of how to set
this feature.

Table 22 Aiming Duration Time Setting Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES

90 Sec. 180 Sec. 255 Seconds
1 Desired Setting 1 Second
(1.5 min.) (3 min.) (4.25 min.)

2 Pad leading zero(es) 001 090 180 255

3 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
4 Scan SELECT AIMING DURATION TIME SETTING
Scan three characters from
5 ‘0’, ‘0’ and ‘1’ ‘0’, ‘9’ and ‘0’ ‘1’, ‘8’ and ‘0’ ‘2’, ‘5’ and ‘5’
Appendix D
6 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 295

REFERENCES

Flash On Time
This feature specifies the ON time for the indicator LED while in Flash Mode. The select-
able range is 100 to 9,900 milliseconds (0.1 to 9.9 seconds), in 100 millisecond incre-
ments.
Follow these instructions to set this feature.

1. Determine the desired setting in milliseconds.

2. Divide the desired setting by 100 (setting is in 100ms increments). Pad the result
with leading zeroes to yield two digits. For example: 0 = 00, 5 = 05, 20 = 20, etc.

3. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to enter Programming

Mode.

4. Scan the bar code: SELECT FLASH ON TIME SETTING on page 94.

5. Scan the appropriate two digits from the keypad in Appendix D, that represent the
duration which was determined in the steps above. You will hear a two-beep indi-
cation after the last character.

NOTE: If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL
bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at
the beginning.

6. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to exit Programming Mode.
This completes the procedure. See the following table for examples of how to set this
feature.

Table 23 Flash On Time Setting Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES

1,000ms 5200ms 9,900ms
1 Desired Setting 500ms
(1 sec.) (5.2 sec.) (9.9 sec.)
Divide by 100
2 (and pad with leading zeroes to 05 10 52 99
yield two digits)
3 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
4 Scan SELECT FLASH ON TIME SETTING
Scan two characters from
5 ‘0’ and ‘5’ ‘1’ and ‘0’ ‘5’ and ‘2’ ‘9’ and ‘9’
Appendix D
6 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

296 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

 SCANNING FEATURES

Flash Off Time

This feature specifies the OFF time for the indicator LED while in Flash Mode. The select-
able range is 100 to 9,900 milliseconds (0.1 to 9.9 seconds), in 100 millisecond incre-
ments.
Follow these instructions to set this feature.

1. Determine the desired setting in milliseconds.

2. Divide the desired setting by 100 (setting is in 100ms increments). Pad the result
with leading zeroes to yield two digits. For example: 0 = 00, 5 = 05, 20 = 20, etc.

3. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to enter Programming

Mode.

4. Scan the bar code: SELECT FLASH OFF TIME SETTING on page 95.

5. Scan the appropriate two digits from the keypad in Appendix D, that represent the
duration which was determined in the steps above. You will hear a two-beep indi-
cation after the last character.

NOTE: If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL
bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at
the beginning.

6. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to exit Programming Mode.
This completes the procedure. See the following table for examples of how to set this
feature.

Table 24 Flash Off Time Setting Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES

1,000ms 5200ms 9,900ms
1 Desired Setting 500ms
(1 sec.) (5.2 sec.) (9.9 sec.)
Divide by 100
2 (and pad with leading zeroes to 05 10 52 99
yield two digits)
3 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
4 Scan SELECT FLASH OFF TIME SETTING
Scan two characters from
5 ‘0’ and ‘5’ ‘1’ and ‘0’ ‘5’ and ‘2’ ‘9’ and ‘9’
Appendix D
6 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 297

REFERENCES

LED AND BEEPER INDICATORS

Good Read LED Duration

This feature specifies the amount of time that the Good Read LED remains on following
a good read. The good read LED on time can be set within a range of 10 milliseconds to
2,550 milliseconds (0.001 to 2.55 seconds) in 100ms increments.
Follow these instructions to set this feature:

1. Determine the desired setting in milliseconds. A setting of 0 means that the good
read LED stays on until the next time the trigger is pulled.

2. Divide the desired setting by 10 (setting is in 100ms increments). Pad the result
with leading zeroes to yield three digits. For example: 0 = 000, 5 = 000, 20 = 020,
etc.

3. Go to page 106 and scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to enter
Programming Mode.

4. Scan the bar code: SELECT GOOD READ LED DURATION SETTING.

5. Scan the appropriate two digits from the keypad in Appendix D, that represent the
duration which was determined in the steps above. You will hear a two-beep indi-
cation after the last character.

NOTE: If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL
bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at
the beginning.

6. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to exit Programming Mode.
This completes the procedure. See the following table for some examples of how to set
this feature.

Table 25 Good Read LED Duration Setting Example

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES

Good Read
LED stays on 2550ms
1 Desired Setting 20ms 150ms
until next trig- (2.55 sec.)
ger pull (00)
Divide by 10 (and pad with lead-
2 000 002 015 255
ing zeroes)
3 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
4 Scan SELECT GOOD READ LED DURATION SETTING
Scan three characters from
5 ‘0’, ‘0’ and ‘0’ ‘0’, ‘0’ and ‘2’ ‘0’, ‘1’ and ‘5’ ‘2’, ‘5’ and ‘5’
Appendix D
6 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

298 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

 RF FEATURES

RF FEATURES

Automatic Configuration Update

When this feature is enabled, the base station and reader will keep their configurations
synchronized. If a reader's configuration is altered by reading programming labels, this
change is automatically transferred and updated in a linked base station. Likewise, if the
base station's configuration is changed using Aladdin or by host commands, then the
reader's configuration will automatically be updated if this feature is enabled.

RF Address Stamping
Source Radio Address Delimiter Character
This option specifies the delimiter character to be placed between the label data and
radio address when address stamping is enabled.

NOTE: This feature only applies if "Source Radio Address Transmission" on

page 266 is enabled

Follow these instructions to select the delimiter character:

1. Determine the desired character, then find its hexadecimal equivalent on the ASCII
Chart on page 345. A setting of 00 specifies no delimiter character.
2. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to enter Programming
Mode.
3. Scan the bar code: SET SOURCE RADIO ADDRESS DELIMITER CHARACTER.
4. Scan the appropriate two digits from the keypad in Appendix D, that represent the
hexadecimal characters which were determined in the steps above. You will hear a
two-beep indication after the last character.

NOTE: If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL
bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at
the beginning.

5. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to exit.

Table 26 Source Radio Address Delimiter Character Setting Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES

No delimiter
1 Desired Setting , (comma) - (dash) / (slash)
character
2 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
3 Scan SET SOURCE RADIO ADDRESS DELIMiTER CHARACTER
Scan Two Characters From
4 ‘0’ and ‘0’ ‘2’ and ‘C’ ‘2’ and ‘D’ ‘2’ AND ‘F’
Appendix D
5 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 299

REFERENCES

STAR Radio Protocol Timeout

This parameter sets the valid wait time before transmission between the handheld
reader and Base Station is considered failed.
When setting this parameter, take into consideration the radio traffic (number of read-
ers in the same area). The selectable range for this feature is from 02 to 25 seconds.
Follow these instructions to set this feature:

1. Determine the desired setting.

2. Pad the number with leading zeroes to yield two digits. For example: 2 = 02, 5 =
05, 25 = 25, etc

3. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE barcode to enter Programming

Mode.

4. Scan the barcode: SELECT RADIO PROTOCOL TIMEOUT.

5. Scan the appropriate two digits from the keypad in Appendix D, that represent the
duration which was determined in the steps above. You will hear a two-beep indi-
cation after the last character.

NOTE: If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL
bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at
the beginning.

6. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE barcode to exit Programming Mode.

This completes the procedure. See following table for some examples of how to set this
feature.

Table 27 STAR Radio Protocol Timeout Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES

1 Desired Setting 2 Seconds 5 Seconds 10 Seconds 25 Seconds
2 Pad with leading zero(es) 2 5 10 25
3 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
4 Scan SELECTSTAR RADIO PROTOCOL TIMEOUT SETTING
Scan two characters from
5 ‘0’ and ‘2’ ‘0’ and ‘5’ ‘1’ and ‘0’ ‘2’ AND ‘5’
Appendix D
5 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

300 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

 SYMBOLOGIES

SYMBOLOGIES

Set Length
Length Control allows you to select either variable length decoding or fixed length
decoding for the specified symbology.

Variable Length: For variable length decoding, a minimum and maximum length may
be set.

Fixed Length: For fixed length decoding, two different lengths may be set.

Set Length 1
This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for a given symbology. Length 1 is the
minimum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first fixed length if in Fixed
Length Mode.
Reference the 1D Symbologies, starting on page 111 to view the selectable range (num-
ber of characters) for the symbology being set.
Follow these instructions to set this feature:

1. Determine the desired character length. Pad the number with leading zeroes to
yield two digits. For example: 0 = 00, 5 = 05, 20 = 20, etc.

2. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to enter Programming

Mode.

3. Scan the “Select Length 1 Setting” for the symbology being set.

4. Scan the appropriate two digits from the keypad in Appendix D, that represent the
length setting which was determined in the steps above. You will hear a two-beep
indication after the last character.

NOTE: If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL
bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at
the beginning.

5. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to exit Programming Mode.
This completes the procedure. See the following table for examples of how to set this
feature.

Table 28 Length 1 Setting Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES

1 Desired Setting 01 Character 07 Character 52 Character 74 Character
2 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
3 Scan SELECT LENGTH 1 SETTING for the desired symbology
Scan two characters from
4 ‘0’ and ‘1’ ‘0’ and ‘7’ ‘5’ and ‘2’ ‘7’ AND ‘4’
Appendix D
5 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 301

REFERENCES

Set Length 2
This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for a given symbology. Length 2 is the
maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the second fixed length if in Fixed
Length Mode.
Reference the 1D Symbologies, starting on page 111 to view the selectable range (num-
ber of characters) for the symbology being set. A setting of 00 specifies to ignore this
length (only one fixed length).
Follow these instructions to set this feature:

1. Determine the desired character length. Pad the number with leading zeroes to
yield two digits. For example: 0 = 00, 5 = 05, 20 = 20, etc.

2. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to enter Programming

Mode.

3. Scan the “Select Length 2 Setting” for the symbology being set.

4. Scan the appropriate two digits from the keypad in Appendix D, that represent the
length setting which was determined in the steps above. You will hear a two-beep
indication after the last character.

NOTE: If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL
bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at
the beginning.

5. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to exit Programming Mode.
This completes the procedure. See the following table for examples of how to set this
feature.

Table 29 Length 2 Setting Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES

00 (ignore
1 Desired Setting 07 Character 52 Character 74 Character
second length)
2 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
3 Scan SELECT LENGTH 2 SETTING
Scan two characters from
4 ‘0’ and ‘0’ ‘0’ and ‘7’ ‘5’ and ‘2’ ‘7’ AND ‘4’
Appendix D
5 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

302 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

CHAPTER 5
MESSAGE FORMATTING

MESSAGE FORMATTING
NOTE: Message Formatting is only available for the PowerScan™ Wireless
model.

A message from the Host to the base must follow these rules:
• If Address stamping options or address delimiter are enabled on the base, the
Host replay must have address field and delimiter too. Otherwise the message will
be ignored. Address delimiter is present only when address stamping is enabled.
• Address stamping is necessary to correctly route the message to the PowerScan
PM96XX, especially when more than one handheld is linked to the same base.
Address stamping could be disabled if the system is in point to point configuration.
If address stamping is not enabled, the messages are addressed to the first hand-
held linked to the base.
• The maximum character length for messages is 48.
• Messages end with “CR” 0x0D ASCII character. The CR character cannot be con-
tained in the middle.
• Messages cannot start with '$' or # because these are reserved for Service mode
command
• Base station can receive host message only if Host Commands Obey/Ignore is set
to Ignore.
• Message could be sent to the HH in response to a Label when “Transmit mode”
require Ack from Host (see transmit mode parameter) or at any time. When mes-
sages are sent not in response to a label must start with DC2 0x12 ASCII character
and could be sent in any transmit mode setting.
• Message could be sent to all HH linked to base by using a Multicast message:
“00 00 00 00 2A AA”
• In order to receive a message, handhelds must not be in Battery Profile = Maxi-
mum Autonomy.
• If you want to control the reader's beeper from the host, you will also probably
want to disable the good transmission beep that is emitted when the code is
received from the base station. (See "Wireless Features" on page 256).
• The message field can store plain text and escape sequences. Escape sequences
are interpreted as commands.

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 303

MESSAGE FORMATTING

The format of the ACK from Host message (used for transmission mode 02) is:
[Scanner_Addr] [Scanner_Addr_delimiter] MESSAGE <CR>

The format of a generic message From Host to HH is:

[Scanner_Addr] [Scanner_Addr_delimiter] DC2 MESSAGE <CR>
where DC2 is ASCII 0x12 (^R) character.
[Items in square brackets are optional.]

LED AND BEEPER CONTROL

The LED control escape sequences are intended to activate the LEDs for short periods of
time and can be used in combination with the Beeper. The LED and Beeper will be con-
trolled by the system after the entire command sequence is interpreted.

ESC SEQUENCE ACTION

Esc [ 0 q Emit short High tone + short delay
Esc [ 1 q Emit short Low tone + short delay
Esc [ 2 q Emit long Low tone + short delay
Esc [ 3 q Emit good read tone
Esc [ 4 q Emit bad tx tone
Esc [ 5 q Wait 100 msec
Esc [ 6 q Turn on the green LED
Esc [ 7 q Turn off the green LED
Esc [ 8 q Turn on the red LED
Esc [ 9 q Turn off the red LED

The LED control escape sequences are intended to activate the LEDs for short periods of
time and can be used in combination with the Beeper. The LED and Beeper will be con-
trolled by the system after the entire command sequence is interpreted.

Example:

Turns on the green LED, emits a good read tone, and turns
Esc [ 6 q Esc [ 3 q Esc [ 7 q
off the green LED.
Turns on the green LED for 100 msec and then turns off the
Esc [ 6 q Esc [ 5 q Esc [ 7 q
green LED.
Escape sequences different from those listed will be ignored.

304 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

APPENDIX A
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
The table below contains Physical and Performance Characteristics, User Environment
and Regulatory information. Table 37 provides Standard Cable Pinouts.

PD96XX TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Table 30 PD96XX Technical Specifications

PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Color Yellow/Black
Height 19.0 cm (7.5'')
Dimensions Length 14.0 cm (5.5”)
Width 7.9 cm (3.1”)
Weight (without cable) 305 gr. (10.7 oz.)
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Input Voltage 5 - 30 VDC ± 5%
Operating (Typical):
PD9630-SR: 200mA @ 5V; 120mA @ 12V
Current PD9630-HP/ PD9630-DC:
Consumption 280mA @ 5V / 140mA @ 12V
Standby/Idle (Typical):
187mA @ 5V / 92mA @ 12V
Reading Indicators Top illumination, Good Read Spot, Beep, Vibration
Interfaces Supported USB, RS-232, Ethernet and Keyboard Wedge
OPTICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Optical Format 1/4"
Imager Sensor 1280 H x 800 V
Illumination System White LED
Aiming System 630 - 680 nm VLD
Reading Angle All models:Pitch: +/- 52°; Skew: +/- 52°
HP: 38° x 24°
Field of View STD: 38° x 24°
DC: 51° x 33.5
Print Contrast Ratio minimum 15%

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 305

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

ENVIRONMENTAL CHARACTERISTICS
Operating Temperature -20° to 50° C (-4° to 122° F)
Storage Temperature -40° to 70° C (-40° to 158° F)
Humidity 0 to 95% non-condensing
Withstands 50 drops from 2.5 m/8.2 ft @20° C;
Drop Resistance
Withstands 50 drops from 2.0 m/6.6 ft @-20° C
Ambient Light Immunity 100,000 Lux
Contaminants: Spray/rain,
IP67 and IP65
Dust/particulates
ESD Protection 20 KV

Regulatory See Regulatory Addendum

DOF - DEPTH OF FIELD (TYPICAL)A

Symbology DOF range
PD96XX-SR:
5 mils: 6.4-30.9 cm (2.5-12.2 in)
20 mils: 4-103.7 cm (1.6-40.8 in)
40 mils: 5.5-175 cm (2.2-68.9 in)
PD96XX-DC:
5 mils: 3.1-39.7 cm (1.2-15.6 in)
Code 128 20 mils: 3.5-119.1 cm (1.3-46.9 in)
40 mils: 4.5-186.6 cm (1.7-73.4 in)
PD96XX-HP:
2.5 mils: 6.3-11.5 cm (2.5-4.5 in)
5 mils: 3.8-41 cm (1.5-16.1 in)
20 mils: 4-157 cm (1.6-61.8 in)
40 mils: 5.5-242.9 cm (2.1-95.6 in)
PD96XX-SR:
13 mils: 4-67.5 cm (1.5-26.5 in)
PD96XX-DC:
EAN13
13 mils: 3.5-102 cm (1.3-40.1 in)
PD96XX-HP:
13 mil: 4-120.2 cm (1.5-40.2 in)
PD96XX-HP:
PDF417
10 mils:0.5-46.1 cm (0.2-18.1 in)
PD96XX-SR:
10 mils: 6.4-30 cm (2.5-11.8 in)
PD96XX-DC:
Datamatrix 10 mils: 4.2-30.2 cm (1.6-11.8 in)
PD96XX-HP:
4 mils: 6.5-9.3 cm (2.5-3.6 in)
10 mils: 4.2-32.1 cm (1.6-12.6 in)
PD96XX-SR:
1D = 3 mils, 2D = 6 mils
PD96XX-DC:
Max Resolution
1D = 3 mils, 2D = 5 mils
PD96XX-HP:
1D = 2.5 mils, 2D = 4 mils
a. 13 mils DOF based on EAN. All other 1D codes are Code 39. All labels grade A, typical environ-
mental light, 20°C, label inclination 10°

306 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

 PM96XX TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

PM96XX TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Table 31 PM96XX Technical Specifications

PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Color Yellow/Black
Height 19.0 cm (7.5'')
Dimensions Length 14.0 cm (5.5”)
Width 7.9 cm (3.1”)
PM96XX no display: 425 gr. (14.9 oz.)
Weight
PM96XX w/display: max 455 gr. (16 oz.)
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Battery Type Li-ion battery pack
Time of Recharge typical @ 25°C ambient temperature
BC9630: Host power 5VDC +/-5%(*) or 10-30 VDC +/-5%
External power 10-30 VDC +/-5%
Base Charger BC9631: Host power 5VDC +/-5%(*) or 10-30 VDC +/-5%
Supply Voltage BC9680: External power 5VDC +/-5% or 10-30 VDC +/-5%
(*) with approved interface cables
Base Charger max. 1.5 A (charging)
Power Consumption max. 500 mA @5 V (charging)
External Power typ. 2h 50’ with 3300 mAh Li-Ion battery, fast charge @ 24V
Host Power USB typ. 15h 15’ with 3300 mAh Li-Ion battery
Host Power USB type C typ. 6h with 3300 mAh Li-Ion battery
Interfaces Supported USB, RS-232, Ethernet and Keyboard Wedge
Max. Scan Rate 50 frames/sec
Reading Indicators Top and rear illumination, Good Read Spot, Beep, Vibrator

OPTICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Optical Format 1/4"
Imager Sensor 1280 H x 800 V
Illumination System White LED
Aiming System 630 - 680 nm VLD
Reading Angle All models: Pitch: +/- 52°; Skew: +/- 52°
HP: 38° x 24°
Field of View
STD: 38° x 24°
Print Contrast Ratio minimum 15%

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 307

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

ENVIRONMENTAL CHARACTERISTICS
Operating Temperature -20° to 50° C (-4° to 122° F)
Recommended 0° to 35° C (32° to 95° F)
Recharging Temperaturea Max allowed 0° to 40° C (32° to 104° F)
Storage Temperature -40° to 70° C (-40° to 158° F)
Humidity 0 to 95% non-condensing
Withstands 50 drops from 2.5 m/8 ft @20° C;
Drop Resistance
Withstands 50 drops from 2.0 m/6.6 ft @-20° C
Ambient Light Immunity 100,000 Lux

Contaminants: Spray/rain,
IP67 and IP65
Dust/particulates

ESD Protection 20 KV

ESD: Opening the battery door allows access to electrostatic sensitive

areas. In particular, when connecting and using the microUSB cable, it
is recommended to operate in an environment with low levels of elec-
trostatic charge (e.g. office) and avoiding the introduction of fingers or
objects into the battery compartment.

a. NOTE: The higher the ambient temperature, the longer the charging time.

RADIO CHARACTERISTICS
Frequency
433MHZ 910MHZ
working center
19.2 kb/s 36.8 kb/s
Programmable Speed
500 kb/s (default) 500 kb/s (default)

100 m (at 500 kb/s) 180 m (at 500 kb/s)

Typical Range 150 m (at 19.2 kb/s) 230 m (at 36.8 kb/s, frequency hopping)
(in open air) 80 m (at 36.8 kb/s, fixed channel)

Max number of devices

per base station 16

NOTE: A radio coverage reduction is expected when the base station is

charging a gun.

308 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

 DECODING CAPABILITIES

DOF - DEPTH OF FIELD (TYPICAL)A

Symbology DOF range
PM96XX:
5 mils: 6.4-30.9 cm (2.5-12.2 in)
20 mils: 4-103.7 cm (1.6-40.8 in)
40 mils: 5.5-175 cm (2.2-68.9 in)
Code 128 PM96XX-HP:
2.5 mils: 6.3-11.5 cm (2.5-4.5 in)
5 mils: 3.8-41 cm (1.5-16.1 in)
20 mils: 4-157 cm (1.6-61.8 in)
40 mils: 5.5-242.9 cm (2.1-95.6 in)
PM96XX:
13 mils: 4-67.5 cm (1.5-26.5 in)
EAN13
PM96XX-HP:
13 mil: 4-120.2 cm (1.5-40.2 in)
PM96XX-HP:
PDF417
10 mils:0.5-46.1 cm (0.2-18.1 in)
PM96XX:
10 mils: 6.4-10 cm (2.5-3.9 in)
Datamatrix PM96XX-HP:
4 mils: 6.5-9.3 cm (2.5-3.6 in)
10 mils: 4.2-32.1 cm (1.6-12.6 in)
PM96XX:
1D = 3 mils, 2D = 6 mils
Max Resolutionb PM96XX-HP:
1D = 2.5 mils, 2D = 4 mils
a. All labels grade A, typical environmental light, 20°C, label inclination 10°
b. 1D codes are Code 39 and 2D codes are Data Matrix

DECODING CAPABILITIES
PD96XX AND PM96XX DECODE CAPABILITY
1D Bar Codes
GS1 Databar linear codes, UPC/EAN (A,E,13,8), including P2/P5 Addons, ISBN ,ISSN,
Code128, EAN128, ISBT128, Code39, Code39 Full ASCII, Code39 CIP, Code 32, Trioptic,
Interleaved 2 of 5, IATA, Industrial 2 of 5, Standard 2 of 5, matrix2 of 5, datalogic 2 of 5, fol-
let 2 of 5, Codabar, Code11, MSI, Plessey, Code 93, Pharmacode, BC412
2D / Stacked Codes
DataMatrix (square, rettangular ), MaxiCode ,QR Codes,(QR, Micro QR and Multiple QR
codes), Aztec
Postal codes including: Australian Post, China Post, Japanese Post, KIX Post, Planet Code,
Postnet, Royal Mail Code(RM45CC), IMB, Sweden Post,Portugal Post, LaPoste A/R 39
Stacked codes including EAN/JAN Composites, GS1 Databar Composites, GS1 Databar
Expanded Stacked; GS1 DataBar Stacked; GS1 DataBar Stacked Omnidirectional, PDF417,
Macro PDF, Micro PDF417, China sensible, DotCode
Other
OCR, Digimarc

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 309

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

BC96XX TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Table 32 BC96XX Technical Specifications

PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Color Black
Height 9.8 cm (3.9'')
Dimensions Length 24.3 cm (9.6'')
Width 10.2 cm (4'')
BC9630 (w/o cable): 590 g
Weight (without cable)
BC9631 (w/o cable): 600 g

ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
BC9630: Host power 5VDC +/-5%(*) or 10-30 VDC +/-5%
External power 10-30 VDC +/-5%
Supply Voltage BC9631: Host power 5VDC +/-5%(*) or 10-30 VDC +/-5%
BC9680: External power 5VDC +/-5% or 10-30 VDC +/-5%
(*) with approved interface cables
max. 1.5 A (charging)
Power Consumption
max. 500 mA @5 V (charging)
Power/Data green LED
Indicators
Reader battery state green/orange fading
Time of Recharge typical @ 25°C ambient temperature

External Power typ. 2h 50’ with 3300 mAh Li-Ion battery, fast charge @ 24V

Host Power USB typ. 15h 15’ with 3300 mAh Li-Ion battery

Host Power USB type C typ. 6h with 3300 mAh Li-Ion battery

ENVIRONMENTAL CHARACTERISTICS
Radio: -20° to +50 °C / -4 to +122 °F
Working Temperature Battery charging: 0 to 40°C nominal (+32° to +104 °F)
0 to 35°C ideal (+32° to +95 °F)
Storage Temperature -40° to +70 °C / -40 to +158 °F
Humidity 90% non condensing
Protection Class BC9630, BC9680: IP40 - BC9631: IP65
RADIO CHARACTERISTICS
Frequency working center 433MHZ 910MHZ
19.2 kb/s 36.8 kb/s
Programmable Speed
500 kb/s (default) 500 kb/s (default)
100 m (at 500 kb/s) 180 m (at 500 kb/s)
Typical Range (in open air) 150 m (at 19.2 kb/s) 230 m (at 36.8 kb/s, frequency hopping)
80 m (at 36.8 kb/s, fixed channel)

Max number of devices per

base station 16

310 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

 LED AND BEEPER INDICATIONS

LED AND BEEPER INDICATIONS

The reader’s beeper sounds and its LED illuminates to indicate various functions or
errors on the reader. An optional “Green Spot” also performs useful functions. The fol-
lowing tables list these indications. One exception to the behaviors listed in the tables is
that the reader’s functions are programmable, and so may or may not be turned on. For
example, certain indications such as the power-up beep can be disabled using program-
ming bar code labels.
Table 33LED and Beeper Indications

INDICATION LED BEEPER

Upper LED flashes/blinks on power-up,
however, this may be too rapid to view. With Reader beeps four times at highest fre-
Power-up
a USB interface, the LED blinks until enu- quency and volume upon power-up.
meration with the host is completed.
LED behavior for this indication is configu-
The reader will beep once at current fre-
rable via the feature “Good Read: When to
Good Read quency, volume, mono/bi-tonal setting
Indicate”.
and duration upon a successful label scan.
The Green spot turns on for a configurable time.
ROM Failure Flashes Reader sounds 4 long beeps.
Limited Scanning Reader 'chirps' six times at the highest
N/A
Label Read frequency and current volume.
Reader Disabled The LED blinks continuously 100mS on / 900mS off N/A
Image Capture Blue light N/A
The scanner turns on the LED for a few sec-
onds indicating the state of the battery.
Double TAP Green: completely charged. N/A
Orange: half charge.
Red: low battery.

USER INDICATIONS FOR PD96XX

Table 34 User Indications for PD96XX

STATUS 3GL AND GOOD READ LED BUZZER

Power-up OFF Rising Beeps’ Sequence
USB Enumeration Phase 250 mseca ON ↔ 250 msec OFF OFF
USB Suspend Depends on Power Cable and specific configurations OFF
Idle OFF OFF
While Reading OFF OFF
Solid ON
Decode Done Single Beep
Programmable Duration (1 s default)
Reader Disabled (POS)
Communication with host not 100 msec ON ↔ 900 msec OFF OFF
established
Firmware Upgrade 250 msec ON ↔ 250 msec OFF OFF
Host Download 250 msec ON ↔ 250 msec OFF OFF
Enter Service Mode No Effect Beeps’ Sequence
Label Programming No Effect Beep
a. “msec” stands for milliseconds, equivalent to 1/1000th of a second

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 311

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

USER INDICATIONS FOR PM96XX (GUN ONLY)

Table 35 User Indications for PM96XX Gun

3GL AND GOOD READ

STATUS BATTERY LED BUZZER
LED
Rising Beeps’
Power-up OFF OFF
Sequence
USB Enumeration Phase 250 mseca ON ↔ 250 msec OFF OFF OFF
Depends on Power Cable and spe-
USB Suspend OFF OFF
cific configurations
Idle OFF OFF OFF
While Reading OFF OFF OFF
Solid ON
Decode Done Programmable Duration (1 s OFF Single Beep
default)
Reader Disabled (POS)
Communication with host 100 msec ON ↔ 900 msec OFF OFF OFF
not established
Firmware Upgrade 250 msec ON ↔ 250 msec OFF OFF OFF
Host Download 250 msec ON ↔ 250 msec OFF OFF OFF
5 cycles: 5 Beeps
Paging Answer OFF
100 msec ON ↔ 900 msec OFF (when LED ON)
Enter Service Mode No Effect OFF Beeps' Sequence
Label Programming No Effect OFF Beep
Single Program-
ACK Received on
OFF OFF mable Beep
Transmission
(OFF by default)
ACK NOT Received on
OFF OFF Wrong Beep
Transmission
base station in USB Depends on Power Cable and spe-
OFF OFF
Suspend cific configurations
Configuration Alignment 250 msec ON ↔ 250 msec OFF OFF OFF
Blinking: 1 s ON . 1 s OFF
Green (charge = 50% -
99%)
Charge in Progress Amber (charge = 1% -
OFF OFF
through microUSBb 49%)
Red (charge less than 1%)
Reader is unusable until
1% is reached
Solid Green
Charge Complete through
OFF It goes OFF when OFF
microUSB
unplugged
Charge Fault OFF OFF OFF
Charge in Progress
OFF OFF OFF
through base station

312 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

 USER INDICATIONS FOR PM96XX (GUN ONLY)

3GL AND GOOD READ

STATUS BATTERY LED BUZZER
LED
Charge Complete through
OFF OFF OFF
base station
Solid with programmable
duration (3 s default) and
then OFF
Battery Status indications Green (charge = 50% -
when not charging, using OFF 100%) OFF
double tap Amber (charge = 2% -
50%)
Red forced loop (charge
less than 2%)
a. “msec” stands for milliseconds, equivalent to 1/1000th of a second
b. In case of heavily depleted battery (e.g. if the reader has not been used for a long time), the reader being charged will
not be operational for a certain amount of time, which can vary from just a few minutes to 30-40 minutes depending
on battery discharge level and power supplied to the base station (i.e. longer time if the base station is connected to
USB only without external power supply).

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 313

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

USER INDICATIONS FOR BC96XX BASE STATIONS

Table 36 User Indications for BC96XX Base Stations

STATUS TRANSMISSION LEDS CHARGING LEDS

Power-up Solid ON OFF
USB Enumeration 250 mseca ON ↔ 250 msec OFF OFF
Depends on Power Cable and specific con-
USB Suspend OFF
figurations
Idle Solid ON OFF
While Reading Solid ON OFF
Label Transmitted to Host OFF for 100 msec andd then Solid ON OFF
Reader Disabled (POS)
Communication with host not 100 msec ON ↔ 900 msec OFF OFF
established
Firmware Upgrade 250 msec ON ↔ 250 msec OFF OFF
Host Download 250 msec ON ↔ 250 msec OFF OFF
Configuration Alignment 250 msec ON ↔ 250 msec OFF OFF
Enter Service Mode No Effect (remains Solid ON) OFF
Blink Green 500 msec ON ↔ 500 msec
Short button press (1-5 s)
OFF OFF
Paging request
(for 5 s while pressing button)
Long button press (6-10 s) Blink Green 1 s ON ↔ 1 s OFF
OFF
Flush Piconet request (for 5 s while pressing button)
Fading: 1 s ON ↔ 1 s OFF
Charge in Progress No Effect Green (charge = 50% - 99%)
Amber (charge = 0% - 49%)
Solid Green
Charge Complete No Effect
It goes OFF when unplugged
Charge Fault No Effect OFF
Electrical Fault OFF OFF
a. “msec” stands for milliseconds, equivalent to 1/1000th of a second

314 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

 PROGRAMMING MODE

PROGRAMMING MODE
The following indications ONLY occur when the reader is in Programming Mode.

INDICATION DESCRIPTION LED BEEPER

Enter Programming A valid programming label LED blinks continu- Reader sounds four low fre-
Mode has been scanned. ously quency beeps.
Reader sounds three times at
Rejection of Label Label has been rejected. N/A lowest frequency & current vol-
ume.
In cases where multiple
labels must be scanned to
Reader sounds one short beep
Acceptance of Partial program one feature, this
N/A at highest frequency & current
Label indication acknowledges
volume.
each portion as it is success-
fully scanned.
Configuration option(s) have
Reader sounds one high fre-
been successfully pro-
Acceptance of quency beep and four low fre-
grammed via labels and the N/A
Programming quency beeps followed by reset
reader has exited Program-
beeps.
ming Mode.
Cancel label has been Reader sounds twice at low fre-
Cancel Item Entry N/A
scanned. quency & current volume.

TROUBLESHOOTING
PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE POSSIBLE SOLUTION
Check system power. Ensure power
No power to the reader
Nothing happens when the supply is connected.
scan button is pulled. Ensure all cable connections are
Interface or power cables are loose.
secure.
Reader not programmed for correct Ensure reader is programmed to read
bar code type. the type of bar code scanned.
Check the label to ensure it is not
LED comes on but bar code
Bar code label is unreadable. defaced. Try scanning another bar code
does not decode.
type.
Distance between reader and bar code Move reader closer to or further from
is incorrect. the bar code.
Bar code is decoded but not Reader not programmed for the cor- Scan the appropriate host type bar
transmitted to the host. rect host type. code.

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 315

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Figure 14 and Table 37 provide standard pinout information for the reader’s cable.
Figure 14 Standard Cable Pinouts

The signal descriptions in Table 37 apply to the connector on the reader and are for ref-
erence only.

Table 37 Standard Cable Pinouts — Reader Side

PIN RS232 USB

1 RTS (out)
2 D+
3 D-
4 GND GND
5 RX
6 TX
7 VCC VCC
8
9
10 CTS (in)

316 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

APPENDIX B
STANDARD DEFAULTS
The most common configuration settings are listed in the “Default” column of the table
below. Page references are also provided for feature descriptions and programming bar
codes for each parameter. A column has also been provided for recording of your pre-
ferred default settings for these same configurable features.

Table 38 Standard Defaults

PARAMETERS DEFAULT YOUR SETTING PAGE NUMBER

GLOBAL INTERFACE FEATURES

Host Commands — Obey/Ignore Obey 36

USB Suspend Mode Enable 36

RS-232 ONLY

Baud Rate 9600 38

Data Bits 115200 Data Bits 39

Stop Bits 1 Stop Bit 39

Parity None 40

Handshaking Control RTS 41

RS-232/USB-COM

Intercharacter Delay No Delay 43

Beep On ASCII BEL Disable 44

Beep On Not on File Enable 44

ACK NAK Options Disable 45

ACK Character ‘ACK’ 46

NAK Character ‘NAK’ 46

ACK NAK Timeout Value 200 msec 47

ACK NAK Retry Count 3 Retries 46

ACK NAK Error Handling Ignore Errors Detected 48

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 317

STANDARD DEFAULTS

PARAMETERS DEFAULT YOUR SETTING PAGE NUMBER

Indicate Transmission Failure Enable 48

Disable Character ‘D’ 49

Enable Character ‘E’ 49

KEYBOARD WEDGE

Setting Country Mode U.S. Keyboard 52

Encoding Type Don't Use Encoding 66

ALT Output Type ALT Unicode 73

Caps Lock State Caps Lock OFF 74

Numlock Numlock Key Unchanged 74

Keyboard Numeric Keypad Standard Keys 75

Keyboard Send Control Characters Send Ctrl+Key 75

Wedge Quiet Interval 10 = Quiet Interval of 100 msec 76

Intercharacter Delay 00 = No Intercharacter Delay 76

Intercode Delay 00 = No Wedge Intercode Delay 77

USB Keyboard Speed 1ms 78

USB OEM

USB-OEM Device Usage Handheld 80

DATA FORMAT

No Global Prefix
Global Prefix/Suffix 82
Global Suffix = 0x0D (CR)

Global AIM ID Disable 84

GS1-128 AIM ID Disable 84

Label ID: Pre-loaded Sets USA Set 85

Label ID Control Disable 86

Label ID Symbology Selection 87

Case Conversion Disable (no case conversion) 83

0xFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
Character Conversion 83
(no character conversion)

READING PARAMETERS

Scan Mode Trigger Simple 93

Scanning Active Time 5 seconds 94

Flash On Time 10 = Flash is ON for 1 second 94

318 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

 STANDARD DEFAULTS

PARAMETERS DEFAULT YOUR SETTING PAGE NUMBER

Flash Off Time 06 = Flash is OFF for 600ms 95

Double Read Timeout 0.6 second 95

Stand Detection Behavior (Desk

Ignore Autorecognition 97
only)

Stand Mode/Object Detection Indica-

Disable 98
tion (Stand Mode Flash)

Stand Mode/Object Detection Sensi-

Medium 98
tivity

Stand Mode/Object Detection Illumi-

1 second 99
nation Off Time

Illumination Intensity Full Intensity 99

Corded Stand Mode Normal Refresh Frequency 100

Corded Stand Mode Disable 100

Dock Detection Beep Disable 100

Power On Alert Power-up Beep 101

Good Read Beep Type Mono 101

Good Read Beep Frequency High 102

Good Read Beep Length 80 msec 103

Good Read Beeper Volume / Vibra-

High 104
tion

Vibration Feedback for Good Read Enable 104

RGB Good Read Enable Enable 105

RGB Good Read Color GREEN 105

Good Read LED Duration 300 msec 106

Good Read: When to Indicate After Decode 107

Green Spot Duration Short (300 msec) 107

Aiming Pointer Enable 108

Pick Mode Disable 108

Mobile Phone Mode Enable 109

Multiple Labels Ordering by Code

Random Order 110
Symbology

Multiple Labels Ordering by Code

Disable 110
Length

CODE SELECTION - 1D SYMBOLOGIE

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 319

STANDARD DEFAULTS

PARAMETERS DEFAULT YOUR SETTING PAGE NUMBER

Code EAN/UPC

Coupon Control Enable only UPC/EAN 112

UPC-A

UPC-A Enable/Disable Enable 113

UPC-A Check Character Transmis-

Send 113
sion

Expand UPC-A to EAN-13 Don’t expand 114

UPC-A Number System Character

Transmit 114
Transmission

UPC-E

UPC-E Enable/Disable Enable 115

UPC-E Check Character Transmis-

Send 115
sion

Expand UPC-E to EAN-13 Don’t expand 116

Expand UPC-E to UPC-A Don’t expand 116

UPC-E Number System Character

Transmit 117
Transmission

GTIN

GTIN Formatting Disable 117

EAN 13 (Jan 13)

EAN-13 Enable/Disable Enable 118

EAN-13 Check Character Transmis-

Send 118
sion

EAN-13 Flag 1 Character Transmit 119

EAN-13 to ISBN Conversion Disable 119

ISSN

EAN-13 to ISSN Conversion Disable 120

EAN 8

EAN-8 Enable/Disable Enable 121

EAN-8 Check Character Transmis-

Send 121
sion

Expand EAN-8 to EAN-13 Don’t Expand 122

UPC/EAN Global Settings

UPC/EAN Price Weight Check Disable 123

320 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

 STANDARD DEFAULTS

PARAMETERS DEFAULT YOUR SETTING PAGE NUMBER

UPC/EAN Quiet Zones Two Modules 124

ADD-ONS

Optional Add-ons Disable P2 and P5 125

Optional Add-On Timer 70 msec 126

GS1 DATABAR™ OMNIDIRECTIONAL

GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional

Disable 127
Enable/Disable

GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional to

Disable 127
GS1-128 Emulation

GS1 DataBar Expanded Enable/Dis-

Disable 128
able

GS1 DataBar Expanded to GS1-128

Disable 128
Emulation

GS1 DataBar Expanded Length Con-

Variable 129
trol

GS1 DataBar Expanded Set Length 1 1 129

GS1 DataBar Expanded Set Length 2 74 130

GS1 DATABAR™ LIMITED

GS1 DataBar Limited Enable/Disable Disable 131

GS1 DataBar Limited to GS1-128

Disable 131
Emulation

CODE 39

Code 39 Enable/Disable Enable 132

Code 39 Check Character Calculation Don’t calculate 132

Code 39 Check Character Transmis-

Send 133
sion

Code 39 Start/Stop Character Trans-

Don’t transmit 133
mission

Code 39 Full ASCII Disable 134

Code 39 Quiet Zones Small Quiet Zones on two sides 134

Code 39 Length Control Variable 135

Code 39 Set Length 1 1 135

Code 39 Set Length 2 50 136

TRIOPTIC CODE

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 321

STANDARD DEFAULTS

PARAMETERS DEFAULT YOUR SETTING PAGE NUMBER

Trioptic Code Enable/Disable Disable 137

CODE 39 DANISH PPT

Code 39 Danish PPT Enable/Disable Disable 137

CODE 39 PZN

Code 39 PZN Enable/Disable Disable 138

CODE 39 LA POSTE

Code 39 La Poste Enable/Disable Disable 138

CODE 32 (Italian Pharmaceutical Code)

Code 32 Enable/Disable Disable 139

Code 32 Check Character Transmis-

Don’t Send 139
sion

Code 32 Start/Stop Character Trans-

Don’t Transmit 140
mission

Code 39 CIP HR (French Pharmaceutical Code)

Code 39 CIP HR Enable/Disable Disable 140

SPECIAL CODES

Code 128

Code 128 Enable/Disable Enable 141

Expand Code 128 to Code 39 Don’t Expand 141

Code 128 Check Character Trans-

Don’t Send 142
mission

Code 128 Function Character Trans-

Don’t Send 142
mission

Code 128 Quiet Zones Auto 143

Code 128 Length Control Variable 143

Code 128 Set Length 1 1 144

Code 128 Set Length 2 80 144

GS1-128

GS1-128 Enable Transmit in Code 128 Data Format 145

INTERLEAVED 2 of 5

I 2 of 5 Enable/Disable Disable 146

I 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation Disable 146

322 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

 STANDARD DEFAULTS

PARAMETERS DEFAULT YOUR SETTING PAGE NUMBER

I 2 of 5 Check Character Transmis-

Send 147
sion

I 2 of 5 Length Control Variable 148

I 2 of 5 Set Length 1 6 148

I 2 of 5 Set Length 2 50 149

INTERLEAVED 2 of 5, FEBRABAN FORMAT (Desk Models Only)

Interleaved 2 of 5, Febraban format

Disable 150
Enable / Disable

INTERLEAVED 2 of 5 CIP HR

Interleaved 2 of 5 CIP HR Enable/

Disable 150
Disable

MATRIX 2 of 5

Matrix 2 of 5 Enable/Disable Disable 151

Matrix 2 of 5 Check Character Calcu-

Enable 151
lation

Matrix 2 of 5 Check Character Trans-

Don’t Send 152
mission

Matrix 2 of 5 Length Control Variable Length 152

Matrix 2 of 5 Set Length 1 8 characters 153

Matrix 2 of 5 Set Length 2 50 characters 153

STANDARD 2 of 5

Standard 2 of 5 Enable/Disable Disable 154

Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Cal-

Disble 154
culation

Standard 2 of 5 Check Character

Send 155
Transmission

Standard 2 of 5 Length Control Variable Length 155

Standard 2 of 5 Set Length 1 08 (8 characters) 156

Standard 2 of 5 Set Length 2 50 (50 characters) 156

COMPRESSED 2 of 5

Compressed 2 of 5 Enable/Disable Disable 157

Compressed 2 of 5 Check Character

Disable 157
Calculation

Compressed 2 of 5 Check Character

Send 158
Transmission

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 323

STANDARD DEFAULTS

PARAMETERS DEFAULT YOUR SETTING PAGE NUMBER

Compressed 2 of 5 Length Control Variable Length 158

Compressed 2 of 5 Set Length 1 1 character 159

Compressed 2 of 5 Set Length 2 50 characters 159

DATALOGIC 2 OF 5

Datalogic 2 of 5 Enable/Disable Disable 160

Datalogic 2 of 5 Check Character

Disable 160
Calculation

Datalogic 2 of 5 Check Character

Send 161
Transmission

Datalogic 2 of 5 Length Control Variable Length 161

Datalogic 2 of 5 Set Length 1 6 characters 162

Datalogic 2 of 5 Set Length 2 50 characters 162

INDUSTRIAL 2 of 5

Industrial 2 of 5 Enable/Disable Disable 163

Industrial 2 of 5 Check Character

Disable 163
Calculation

Industrial 2 of 5 Check Character

Send 164
Transmission

Industrial 2 of 5 Length Control Variable 164

Industrial 2 of 5 Set Length 1 6 characters 165

Industrial 2 of 5 Set Length 2 50 characters 165

CODE IATA

IATA Enable/Disable Disable 166

IATA Check Character Transmission Send 166

FOLLET 2 OF 5

Follett 2 of 5 Enable/Disable Disable 167

CODABAR

Codabar Enable/Disable Disable 168

Codabar Check Character Calcula-

Disable 168
tion

Codabar Check Character Transmis-

Send 169
sion

Codabar Start/Stop Character

Transmit 169
Transmission

324 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

 STANDARD DEFAULTS

PARAMETERS DEFAULT YOUR SETTING PAGE NUMBER

Codabar Start/Stop Character Set abcd/abcd 170

Codabar Start/Stop Character Match Don’t Require Match 170

Codabar Quiet Zones Quiet Zones on two sides 171

Codabar Length Control Variable 172

Codabar Set Length 1 3 characters 172

Codabar Set Length 2 50 characters 173

ABC CODABAR

ABC Codabar Enable/Disable Disable 174

ABC Codabar Concatenation Mode Static 174

ABC Codabar Dynamic Concatena-

200 msec 175
tion Timeout

ABC Codabar Force Concatenation Disable 175

ISBT-128

ISBT 128 Concatenation Disable 176

ISBT 128 Concatenation Mode Static 176

ISBT 128 Dynamic Concatenation

200 msec 177
Timeout

ISBT 128 Force Concatenation Disable 178

ISBT 128 Advanced Concatenation

Disable 178
Options

CODE 11

Code 11 Enable/Disable Disable 179

Code 11 Check Character Calculation Check C and K 179

Code 11 Check Character Transmis-

Send 180
sion

Code 11 Length Control Variable 180

Code 11 Set Length 1 4 characters 181

Code 11 Set Length 2 50 characters 181

CODE 93

Code 93 Enable/Disable Disable 182

Code 93 Check Character Calculation Enable Check C and K 182

Code 93 Check Character Transmis-

Disable 183
sion

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 325

STANDARD DEFAULTS

PARAMETERS DEFAULT YOUR SETTING PAGE NUMBER

Code 93 Length Control Variable 183

Code 93 Set Length 1 1 character 184

Code 93 Set Length 2 50 characters 184

Code 93 Quiet Zones Auto 185

MSI

MSI Enable/Disable Disable 186

MSI Check Character Calculation Calculate Mod 10 186

MSI Check Character Transmission Send 187

MSI Length Control Variable 187

MSI Set Length 1 1 character 188

MSI Set Length 2 50 characters 188

PLESSEY

Plessey Enable/Disable Disable 189

Plessey Check Character Calculation Plessey std check char. verification 189

Plessey Check Character Transmis-

Send 190
sion

Plessey Length Control Variable 190

Plessey Set Length 1 1 character 191

Plessey Set Length 2 50 characters 191

BC412

BC412 Enable/Disable Disable 192

BC412 Check Character Calculation Calculate 192

BC412 Length Control Variable 192

BC412 Set Length 1 1 character 193

BC412 Set Length 2 50 characters 193

CODE SELECTION - 2D SYMBOLOGIES

2D Maximum Decoding Time 350 msec 196

2D Structured Append Disable 197

2D Normal/Inverse Symbol Control Normal 197

AZTEC CODE

Aztec Code Enable / Disable Enable 199

326 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

 STANDARD DEFAULTS

PARAMETERS DEFAULT YOUR SETTING PAGE NUMBER

Aztec Code Length Control Variable 199

Aztec Code Set Length 1 1 character 197

Aztec Code Set Length 2 3,832 characters 200

CHINA SENSIBLE CODE

China Sensible Code Enable / Dis-

Disable 201
able

China Sensible Code Length Control Variable 201

China Sensible Code Set Length 1 1 character 202

China Sensible Code Set Length 2 7,827 characters 202

DATA MATRIX

Data Matrix Enable / Disable Enable 203

Data Matrix Square/Rectangular Both Sqaure and Rectangular

203
Style Style

Data Matrix Length Control Variable 204

Data Matrix Set Length 1 1 character 204

Data Matrix Set Length 2 3,116 characters 205

GS1 DOTCODE

DotCode Enable Disable 206

DotCode High Resolution Enable Enable 206

DotCode Position-based Decoding Disable 207

MAXICODE

Maxicode Enable / Disable Disable 208

Maxicode Primary Message Trans-

Disable 208
mission

Maxicode Length Control Variable 209

Maxicode Set Length 1 1 character 209

Maxicode Set Length 2 0145 characters 210

PDF417

PDF417 Enable / Disable Enable 211

PDF417 Length Control Variable 211

PDF417 Set Length 1 1 character 212

PDF417 Set Length 2 2,710 characters 212

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 327

STANDARD DEFAULTS

PARAMETERS DEFAULT YOUR SETTING PAGE NUMBER

MICRO PDF417

Micro PDF417 Enable / Disable Enable 213

Micro PDF417 Code 128 GS1-128 Micro PDF AIM ID and label
213
Emulation type

Micro PDF417 Length Control Variable 214

Micro PDF417 Set Length 1 1 character 214

Micro PDF417 Set Length 2 0366 characters 215

QR CODE

QR Code Enable / Disable Enable 216

QR Code Length Control Variable 216

QR Code Set Length 1 1 character 217

QR Code Set Length 2 7,089 characters 217

MICRO QR CODE

Micro QR Code Enable / Disable Enable 218

Micro QR Code Length Control Variable 218

Micro QR Code Set Length 1 1 character 219

Micro QR Code Set Length 2 0035 characters 219

UCC COMPOSITE

UCC Optional Composite Timer Timer Disabled 220

Postal Code Selection Disable All Postal Codes 221

Postnet BB Control Disable 222

DISPLAY AND KEYBOARD FEATURES

Display Operating Mode Local Echo Mode 224

Display Off Timeout 8 second delay 224

Backlight Enable Disable 225

Font Size Small 225

Key Programming All keys enabled 227

Arrow Keys Mode (4-key models

String Association Mode 228
only)

Arrow Up String (4-key models only) - 228

Arrow Down String (4-key models

- 229
only)

328 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

 STANDARD DEFAULTS

PARAMETERS DEFAULT YOUR SETTING PAGE NUMBER

Action Configuration for Function

F1 no action configured 231
Keys

Function Keys Configuration for 16-

- 232
key Models Only

Function Keys Configuration for 4-

- 233
key Models Only

Configure string 1-5. - 234

Last Code Shown Timeout - 235

Display Time Stamping Mode Applied to both 235

Mode Selection Set to normal mode 236

Transmit code with default qty

Quantity Field 236
(‘1’)

Quantity/Code Send Mode Qty precedes Code 237

Quantity/Code Separator No separator 237

Interkey Timeout 1.0 seconds 238

Append Code Overwrite always 239

Echo Full Keypad echo 240

Keypress Sound Disable 240

Lower Case Disable Lower Case 241

Set Function Key Labels 0x000000000000000000000000 242

Barcode/Key Different Data Format Disable 243

Set Barcode Header - 243

Set Barcode Terminator - 243

Set Key Sequence ID - 244

Set Key Sequence Header - 244

Set Key Sequence Terminator - 244

Set String ID 0x000000000000000000000000 245

Set String Header 0x000000000000000000000000 245

Set String Terminator 0x000000000000000000000000 246

OCR DECODING

OCR Decoding Predefined Templates Disable OCR Function 248

MOTION FEATURES

Motionless Timeout 2 seconds 250

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 329

STANDARD DEFAULTS

PARAMETERS DEFAULT YOUR SETTING PAGE NUMBER

Motion Sensitivity Medium 250

Motion Aiming Control Enable 251

POWER MANAGEMENT

Powerdown Timeout 30 minutes 253

Battery Profiles Maximum performance 254

WIRELESS FEATURES

Good Transmission Beep Enable 257

Beeper Frequency Low 257

Beep Duration 80 msec 258

Beep Volume High 259

Disconnect Beep Enable 259

Docking (Connecting) Beep Enable 260

Leash Alarm Diable 260

Automatic Configuration Update Enable 262

Copy Configuration to Reader - 262

Copy Configuration to Base Station - 262

Batch Mode Disable 263

Send Batch - 263

Erase Batch Memory - 264

RF Batch Mode Transmit Delay No delay 264

Direct Radio Autolink Unlink Label Required 265

Source Radio Address Transmission Do not include 266

Source Radio Address Delimiter

no delimiter character 266
Character

STAR Radio Protocol Timeout 2 seconds 267

STAR Radio Transmit Mode ACK from Base Station 268

STAR System Speed High Speed 269

STAR Frequency Agility Disable 270

330 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

 STANDARD DEFAULTS

DEFAULT EXCEPTIONS
Table 39 - Default Exceptions by Interface Type

PARAMETER DEFAULT EXCEPTION

Interfaces: USB-OEM
Global Suffix No Global Suffix
Double Read Timeout 500 msec
Interfaces: All Keyboard Wedge, USB Keyboard
No unique settings
Interface: RS232-WN
Expand UPC-A to EAN-13 Enable
UPC-E Check Character Transmission Disable
Parity Odd Parity
Handshaking Control RTS/CTS
Transmission Label ID Code Prefix
GS1-128 AIM ID Disable
UPCE Label ID Character(s) C
EAN 8 Label ID Character(s) B
EAN 13 Label ID Character(s) A
Code ISBN Label ID Character(s) A
Code 39 Label ID Character(s) M
MInterleaved 2of5 Label ID Character(s) I
Code Standard 2/5 Label ID Character(s) H
Codabar Label ID Character(s) N
Code 128 Label ID Character(s) K
GS1-128 Label ID Character(s) P
Datalogic 2 of 5 Label ID Character(s) H
ISBT 128 Label ID Character(s) K
UPCE P2 Label ID Character(s) C
UPCE/P5 Label ID Character(s) C
UPCE/GS1-128 Label ID Character(s) C
EAN8/P2 Label ID Character(s) B
EAN8/P5 Label ID Character(s) B
EAN8/GS1-128 Label ID Character(s) B
EAN13/P2 Label ID Character(s) A
EAN13/P5 Label ID Character(s) A
EAN13/GS1-128 Label ID Character(s) A

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 331

STANDARD DEFAULTS

PARAMETER DEFAULT EXCEPTION

GS1 DataBar 14 (Omnidirectional) Label ID Character(s) E
GS1 DataBar Expanded Label ID Character(s) E
GS1 DataBar Limited Label ID Character(s) E
Character Conversion CR to `
Interface: RS232-OPOS
Baud Rate 115200 Baud
Transmission Label ID Code Prefix
GS1-128 AIM ID Disable
UPCA Label ID Character(s) C
UPCE Label ID Character(s) D
EAN 8 Label ID Character(s) A
EAN 13 Label ID Character(s) B
Code ISBN Label ID Character(s) @
Code 39 Label ID Character(s) V
Code 32 Label ID Character(s) X
Interleaved 2of5 Label ID Character(s) N
Code Standard 2/5 Label ID Character(s) P
Codabar Label ID Character(s) R
Code 11 Label ID Character(s) b
Code 128 Label ID Character(s) T
GS1-128 Label ID Character(s) k
UPCA/P2 Label ID Character(s) F
UPCA/P5 Label ID Character(s) G
UPCA/GS1-128 Label ID Character(s) Q
UPCE P2 Label ID Character(s) H
UPCE/P5 Label ID Character(s) I
EAN8/P2 Label ID Character(s) J
EAN8/P5 Label ID Character(s) K
EAN8/GS1-128 Label ID Character(s) *
EAN13/P2 Label ID Character(s) L
EAN13/P5 Label ID Character(s) M
EAN13/GS1-128 Label ID Character(s) #
GS1 DataBar 14 (Omnidirectional) Label ID Character(s) u
GS1 DataBar Expanded Label ID Character(s) t
GS1 DataBar Limited Label ID Character(s) v

332 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

APPENDIX C
SAMPLE BARCODES
The sample bar codes in this appendix are typical representations for their symbology
types.

SAMPLE BARCODES

1D Barcodes

UPC-A

EAN-13

Code 39

Code 128

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 333

SAMPLE BARCODES

Interleaved 2 of 5

12345678901231

Code 32

Codabar

Code 93

Code 11

334 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

 SAMPLE BARCODES

GS1 Databar™ (RSS)

GS1 DataBar™ variants must be enabled to read the barcodes below (see "GS1
DataBar™ Omnidirectional" on page 127).

GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Stacked

10293847560192837465019283746029478450366523

GS1 DataBar™ Expanded

1234890hjio9900mnb

GS1 DataBar™ Limited

08672345650916

GS1 Databar™ (-14)

GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional Truncated

55432198673467
GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional Stacked

90876523412674
GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional Stacked

78123465709811

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 335

SAMPLE BARCODES

2D Barcodes

Aztec

Data Matrix

China Sensible

MaxiCode

Test Message

PDF417

ABCabc

Micro PDF 417

BV17453

336 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

 SAMPLE BARCODES

QR Code

35900G9

2D Barcodes (continued)

Micro QR Code

123456

UCC Composite

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 337

APPENDIX D
KEYPAD
Use the bar codes in this appendix to enter numbers as you would select digits/charac-
ters from a keypad.

338 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

1

CANCEL

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 339

APPENDIX E
SCANCODE TABLES

CONTROL CHARACTER EMULATION

Control character emulation selects from different scancode tables as listed in this
appendix. Each of the control character sets below are detailed by interface type in the
tables. These apply to Wedge and USB Keyboard platforms.

Control Character 00 : Characters from 00 to 0x1F are sent as control character

Ctrl+Keys, special keys are located from 0x80 to 0xA1.

Control Character 01 : Characters from 00 to 0x1F are sent as control character

Ctrl+Capital Key, special keys are located from 0x80 to 0xA1.

Control Character 02 : Special keys are located from 00 to 0x1F and characters from
0x80 to 0xFE are intended as an extended ASCII table.

Single Press and Release Keys

In the following tables, Ar↓ means Alt right pressed and Ar↑ means Alt right released
and so on. Definitions for other keys are Al (Alt left ), Cr (Control Right ) Cl (Control Left )
Sh (shift). This method can be used for combining Alt, Control or Shift with other keys.
Example: Consider a Control character set to 00. If AltRight+A is required before sending
a label to the host, it could be done by setting three Prefix keys in this way: 0x99 0x41
0x9A.

340 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

 INTERFACE TYPE PC AT PS/2, USB-KEYBOARD OR USB-KEYBOARD FOR APPLE
Table 40. Scancode Set When Control Character is 00 or 01

x0 x1 x2 x3 x4 x5 X6 x7 x8 x9 xA xB xC xD xE xF
NULL SOH STX ETX EOT ENQ ACK BEL HT LF VT FF CR SO SI
0x BS
C+@ C(S)+A C(S)+B C(S)+C C(S)+D C(S)+E C(S)+F C(S)+G TAB C(S)+J C(S)+K C(S)+L Enter C(S)+N C(S)+O
DLE DC1 DC2 DC3 DC4 NAK SYN ETB CAN EM SUB ESC FS GS RS US
1x
C(S)+P C(S)+Q C(S)+R C(S)+S C(S)+T C(S)+U C(S)+V C(S)+W C(S)+X C(S)+Y C(S)+Z Esc C+\ C+] C+^ C(S)+_
2x SP ! " # $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . /
3x 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : ; < = > ?
4x @ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O
5x P Q R S T U V W X Y Z [ \ ] ^ _
6x ` a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o
7x p q r s t u v w x y z { | } ~ Del
Ent
8x € Sh↓ Sh↑ Ins F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11
(keyp)
9x F12 Home End Pg Up Pg Dwn     Ar↓ Ar↑ Al↓ Al↑ Cl ↓ Cl ↑ Cr ↓
Ax Cr ↑ ‫‫‬ ‘ ƒ „ … † ‡ ˆ ‰ Š ‹ Ś ‹ Œ ‫‫‬
Bx ° ± ² ³ ´ µ ¶ · ¸ ¹ º » ¼ ½ ¾ ¿
Cx À Á Â Ã Ä Å Æ Ç È É Ê Ë Ì Í Î Ï
Dx Ð ‫‫‬ Ò Ó Ô Õ Ö × Ø Ù Ú Û Ü Ý Þ ß
Ex à á â ã ä å æ ç è é ê ë ì í î ï
Fx ð ñ ò ó ô õ ö ÷ ø ù ú û ü ý þ ÿ

Extended characters (sky blue) are sent through dedicated keys (when available in the selected country mode) or by using an Alt Mode sequence.

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 341

INTERFACE TYPE PC AT PS/2, USB-KEYBOARD OR USB-KEYBOARD FOR APPLE
 INTERFACE TYPE PC AT PS/2, USB-KEYBOARD OR USB-KEYBOARD FOR APPLE (CONTINUED)
Table 41. Scancode Set When Control Character is 02
SCANCODE TABLES

x0 x1 x2 x3 x4 x5 X6 x7 x8 x9 xA xB xC xD xE xF
Enter
0x Ar↓ Ar↑ Al↓ Al ↑ Cl ↓ Cl ↑ Cr ↓ Cr ↑ BS Tab  S+ Tab Enter Ins Pg Up
Keypd

342 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

1x Pg Dwn Home    F6 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 ESC F7 F8 F9 F10
2x Space ! “ # $ % & ‘ ( ) * + , - . /
3x 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : ; < = > ?
4x @ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O
5x P Q R S T U V W X Y Z [ \ ] ^ _
6x ` a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o
7x p q r s t u v w x y z { | } ~ Del
8x € ‫‫‬ ‘ ƒ „ … † ‡ ˆ ‰ Š ‹ Ś ‹ Œ ‫‫‬
9x ‫‫‬ ‘ ’ “ ” • – — ˜ ™ š › œ ‫‫‬ ž Ÿ
Ax NBSP ¡ ¢ £ ¤ ¥ ¦ § ¨ © ª « ¬ - ® ¯
Bx ° ± ² ³ ´ µ ¶ · ¸ ¹ º » ¼ ½ ¾ ¿
Cx À Á Â Ã Ä Å Æ Ç È É Ê Ë Ì Í Î Ï
Dx Ð ‫‫‬ Ò Ó Ô Õ Ö × Ø Ù Ú Û Ü Ý Þ ß
Ex à á â ã ä å æ ç è é ê ë ì í î ï
Fx ð ñ ò ó ô õ ö ÷ ø ù ú û ü ý þ ÿ
 INTERFACE TYPE PC AT PS/2 ALT MODE OR USB-KEYBOARD ALT MODE
Table 42. Scancode Set When Control Character is 00 or 01

x0 x1 x2 x3 x4 x5 X6 x7 x8 x9 xA xB xC xD xE Xf
HT CR
0x Alt+000 Alt+001 Alt+002 Alt+003 Alt+004 Alt+005 Alt+006 Alt+007 BS Alt+010 Alt+011 Alt+012 Alt+014 Alt+015
TAB Enter
ESC
1x Alt+016 Alt+017 Alt+018 Alt+019 Alt+020 Alt+021 Alt+022 Alt+023 Alt+024 Alt+025 Alt+026 Alt+028 Alt+029 Alt+030 Alt+031
Esc
2x A+032 A+033 A+034 A+035 A+036 A+037 A+038 A+039 A+040 A+041 A+042 A+043 A+044 A+045 A+046 A+047
3x A+048 A+049 A+050 A+051 A+052 A+053 A+054 A+055 A+056 A+057 A+058 A+059 A+060 A+061 A+062 A+063
4x A+064 A+065 A+066 A+067 A+068 A+069 A+070 A+071 A+072 A+073 A+074 A+075 A+076 A+077 A+078 A+079
5x A+080 A+081 A+082 A+083 A+084 A+085 A+086 A+087 A+088 A+089 A+090 A+091 A+092 A+093 A+094 A+095
6x A+096 A+097 A+098 A+099 A+100 A+101 A+102 A+103 A+104 A+105 A+106 A+107 A+108 A+109 A+110 A+111
7x A+112 A+113 A+114 A+115 A+116 A+117 A+118 A+119 A+120 A+121 A+122 A+123 A+124 A+125 A+126 A+127
Ent
8x € Sh↓ Sh↑ Ins F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11
(keyp)
9x F12 Home End Pg Up Pg Dwn     Ar↓ Ar↑ Al↓ Al ↑ Cl ↓ Cl ↑ Cr ↓
Ax Cr ↑ A+0161 A+0162 A+0163 A+0164 A+0165 A+0166 A+0167 A+0168 A+0169 A+0170 A+0171 A+0172 A+0173 A+0174 A+0175
Bx A+0176 A+0177 A+0178 A+0179 A+0180 A+0181 A+0182 A+0183 A+0184 A+0185 A+0186 A+0187 A+0188 A+0189 A+0190 A+0191
Cx A+0192 A+0193 A+0194 A+0195 A+0196 A+0197 A+0198 A+0199 A+0200 A+0201 A+0202 A+0203 A+0204 A+0205 A+0206 A+0207
Dx A+0208 A+0209 A+0210 A+0211 A+0212 A+0213 A+0214 A+0215 A+0216 A+0217 A+0218 A+0219 A+0220 A+0221 A+0222 A+0223
Ex A+0224 A+0225 A+0226 A+0227 A+0228 A+0229 A+0230 A+0231 A+0232 A+0233 A+0234 A+0235 A+0236 A+0237 A+0238 A+0239
Fx A+0240 A+0241 A+0242 A+0243 A+0244 A+0245 A+0246 A+0247 A+0248 A+0249 A+0250 A+0251 A+052 A+0253 A+0254 A+0255

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 343

INTERFACE TYPE PC AT PS/2 ALT MODE OR USB-KEYBOARD ALT MODE
 INTERFACE TYPE PC AT PS/2 ALT MODE OR USB-KEYBOARD ALT MODE (CONTINUED)
Table 43. Scancode Set When Control Character is 02
SCANCODE TABLES

x0 x1 x2 x3 x4 x5 X6 x7 x8 x9 xA xB xC xD xE xF
Enter
0x Ar↓ Ar↑ Al↓ Al ↑ Cl ↓ Cl ↑ Cr ↓ Cr ↑ BS Tab  S+ Tab Enter Ins Pg Up
Keypd

344 POWERSCAN™ PD/PM96XX

1x Pg Dwn Home    F6 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 ESC F7 F8 F9 F10
2x A+032 A+033 A+034 A+035 A+036 A+037 A+038 A+039 A+040 A+041 A+042 A+043 A+044 A+045 A+046 A+047
3x A+048 A+049 A+050 A+051 A+052 A+053 A+054 A+055 A+056 A+057 A+058 A+059 A+060 A+061 A+062 A+063
4x A+064 A+065 A+066 A+067 A+068 A+069 A+070 A+071 A+072 A+073 A+074 A+075 A+076 A+077 A+078 A+079
5x A+080 A+081 A+082 A+083 A+084 A+085 A+086 A+087 A+088 A+089 A+090 A+091 A+092 A+093 A+094 A+095
6x A+096 A+097 A+098 A+099 A+100 A+101 A+102 A+103 A+104 A+105 A+106 A+107 A+108 A+109 A+110 A+111
7x A+112 A+113 A+114 A+115 A+116 A+117 A+118 A+119 A+120 A+121 A+122 A+123 A+124 A+125 A+126 A+127
8x A+0128 A+0129 A+0130 A+0131 A+0132 A+0133 A+0134 A+0135 A+0136 A+0137 A+0138 A+0139 A+0140 A+0141 A+0142 A+0143
9x A+0144 A+0145 A+0146 A+0147 A+0148 A+0149 A+0150 A+0151 A+0152 A+0153 A+0154 A+0155 A+0156 A+0157 A+0158 A+0159
Ax A+0160 A+0161 A+0162 A+0163 A+0164 A+0165 A+0166 A+0167 A+0168 A+0169 A+0170 A+0171 A+0172 A+0173 A+0174 A+0175
Bx A+0176 A+0177 A+0178 A+0179 A+0180 A+0181 A+0182 A+0183 A+0184 A+0185 A+0186 A+0187 A+0188 A+0189 A+0190 A+0191
Cx A+0192 A+0193 A+0194 A+0195 A+0196 A+0197 A+0198 A+0199 A+0200 A+0201 A+0202 A+0203 A+0204 A+0205 A+0206 A+0207
Dx A+0208 A+0209 A+0210 A+0211 A+0212 A+0213 A+0214 A+0215 A+0216 A+0217 A+0218 A+0219 A+0220 A+0221 A+0222 A+0223
Ex A+0224 A+0225 A+0226 A+0227 A+0228 A+0229 A+0230 A+0231 A+0232 A+0233 A+0234 A+0235 A+0236 A+0237 A+0238 A+0239
Fx A+0240 A+0241 A+0242 A+0243 A+0244 A+0245 A+0246 A+0247 A+0248 A+0249 A+0250 A+0251 A+052 A+0253 A+0254 A+0255
APPENDIX F
ASCII CHART

ASCII Hex ASCII Hex ASCII Hex ASCII Hex

Char. No. Char. No. Char. No. Char. No.
NUL 00 SP 20 @ 40 ‘ 60
SOH 01 ! 21 A 41 a 61
STX 02 “ 22 B 42 b 62
ETX 03 # 23 C 43 c 63
EOT 04 $ 24 D 44 d 64
ENQ 05 % 25 E 45 e 65
ACK 06 & 26 F 46 f 66
BEL 07 ’ 27 G 47 g 67
BS 08 ( 28 H 48 h 68
HT 09 ) 29 I 49 i 69
LF 0A * 2A J 4A j 6A
VT 0B + 2B K 4B k 6B
FF 0C , 2C L 4C l 6C
CR 0D - 2D M 4D m 6D
SO 0E . 2E N 4E n 6E
SI 0F / 2F O 4F o 6F
DLE 10 0 30 P 50 p 70
DC1 11 1 31 Q 51 q 71
DC2 12 2 32 R 52 r 72
DC3 13 3 33 S 53 s 73
DC4 14 4 34 T 54 t 74
NAK 15 5 35 U 55 u 75
SYN 16 6 36 V 56 v 76
ETB 17 7 37 W 57 w 77
CAN 18 8 38 X 58 x 78
EM 19 9 39 Y 59 y 79
SUB 1A : 3A Z 5A z 7A
ESC 1B ; 3B [ 5B { 7B
FS 1C < 3C \ 5C | 7C
GS 1D = 3D ] 5D } 7D
RS 1E > 3E ^ 5E ~ 7E
US 1F ? 3F _ 5F DEL 7F

PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE 345

© 2011-2022 Datalogic S.p.A. and /or its affiliates • All rights reserved • Without
limiting the rights under copyright, no part of this documentation may be repro-
duced, stored in or introduced into a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or
by any means, or for any purpose, without the express written permission of Data-
logic S.p.A. and/or its affiliates • Datalogic and the Datalogic logo are registered
trademarks of Datalogic S.p.A. in many countries, including the U.S. and the E.U.

[Link]

Datalogic S.r.l.
Via S. Vitalino, 13 | 40012 Calderara di Reno | Bologna - Italy
Tel. +39 051 3147011 | Fax +39 051 3147205

820125000 (Rev. A) May 2022